Maintenance NPM

Operating Instructions
Confirmation
Maintenance
Overview
Production Modular
Model No. NM-EJM6D
NM-EJM6D-MA
maintenance
Periodic
NM-EJM6D-MD
NPM-D3 NM-EJM6D-A
Replacement
Production Modular
NM-EJM6D-D
Operating
Consumable parts
replacement
Instructions
Installation Calibration
Thank you for purchasing a
Panasonic brand equipment.
●Be sure to read the
Operating Instructions for
Others
proper and safe usage.
●Before placing the machine
in service, be sure to read
the Safety precautions.
Reference
●Please keep these
operating instructions for
future reference.
N7201A588E01
NPM-D3 S-2 EJM6DE-FC-01M-01
Original Instructions
Use of this equipment
About this equipment

●This equipment is designed and manufactured to be used for electrical component mount on PCBs or
similar boards. It should not be used for any other purpose.
●This equipment requires board handling equipment, i.e. conveyors, at the entrance and exit side of the
machine.
For proper operation

●The machine should only be operated by operators who have received and completed a dedicated training
curriculum.
●This machine should not be operated by persons that have not received any formal training.
●For information regarding available training courses, please contact Panasonic Factory Solutions Co., Ltd.
or Panasonic Factory Solutions Europe.
For Service and Supply of Spares in Europe
Manufactured by : Panasonic Factory Solutions Co.,
you may contact Panasonic Europe:
Ltd.
Continental Europe
1375 Kamisukiawara, Showa-cho, Nakakoma-gun,
Panasonic Factory Solutions Europe
Yamanashi
Winsbergring 15
409-3895, Japan
22525 Hamburg Germany
TEL: 81-55-275-6223
Phone number:0049-(0)40-85386-321
FAX: 81-55-243-4972
Fax number:0049-(0)40-85386-332
United Kingdom
Panasonic Factory Solutions Europe
Panasonic House, Willoughby Road
Bracknell, Berks. RG12 8 FP
Phone number:0044-(0)1344-853267
Fax number:0044-(0)1344-425970
Contents of CE Declaration of Conformity

The following information applies to equipment to which the CE label is affixed.
(Manufacturer) (Council directive)

Panasonic Factory Solutions Co., Ltd. Machinery Directive: 2006/42/EC
2-7, Matsuba-cho, Kadoma, Osaka 571-8502 EMC Directive: 2004/108/EC
Japan (Harmonized standards)
(Product) EN ISO 12100:2010,
Production Modular EN 60204-1:2006 +A1:2009,
(Trade Name) EN 61000-6-4:2007 +A1:2011,
Panasonic EN 61000-6-2:2005
(Model ID) (Authorized Representative in EU)
NPM-D3 Panasonic Testing Centre
(Model No.) Panasonic Marketing Europe GmbH
NM-EJM6D, NM-EJM6D-N , NM-EJM6D-MD, Winsbergring 15, 22525 Hamburg, F.R. Germany
NM-EJM6D-MA, NM-EJM6D-DA, NM-EJM6D-D
NM-EJM6D-A
(Statement)
The object of the declaration described above is
in conformity with the requirements of the
following EU legislations and harmonized
standards:
NPM-D3 S-3 EJM6DE-BP-01N-00

Model No.
The Model No. of NPM-D3 varies depending on a head configuration on delivery to customers.
The Model No. and head configuration are as follows.
Model No. Position Head Configuration
Front side Mounting head Mounting head No head

NM-EJM6D
Rear side Mounting head No head Mounting head
Front side Inspection head

NM-EJM6D-MA
Rear side Mounting head
Front side Dispensing head Mounting head

NM-EJM6D-MD
Rear side Mounting head Dispensing head
Front side Inspection head

NM-EJM6D-A
Rear side No head
Front side Dispensing head No head

NM-EJM6D-D
Rear side No head Dispensing head
Mounting heads: Light weight 16-nozzle head, 12-nozzle head, 8-nozzle head, 2-nozzle head.

Equipment notifies you of the time
for maintenance!
Checking Cleaning
 Periodic cleaning
 Confirmation of tasks
 Occasional cleaning when it gets dirty.
 Maintenance tasks
(Equipment may malfunction when unclean.)
 Update history
Greasing
 Correct amount of grease in the appropriate
locations.
 Proper application and handling to avoid harm
to body and prevent risk of fire.
Exchanging
 Regularly replace the consumable parts.
 Use the specified parts.
 Proper disposal and recycle.

Flashing green-colored Organization of Manuals
message indicates the time Preparation and how to
for periodic inspections. use
(When 80% of the maintenance cycle ■Operating Procedure
duration has passed) Describes overall operating
procedure from production
preparation including material
setting to data configuration and
modification.
Required checks and
cleaning
■Maintenance
Describes contents of regularly
required checks, adjustments
and cleaning including
procedures to exchange
consumable parts.
Getting help
■Troubleshooting
Describes errors or problems
that may occur on the equipment
and associated
countermeasures.
●Please note that contents of this manual are
subject to change without notice.
●Other manuals (separate volumes)
・LNB ・Automatic changeover
・Transcription unit for ・Host communication
general purpose ・Support station
・Component verification
option (wired)
・Component verification
option (wireless)
Above manuals are included depending on your
machine optional configuration.
See each manual for details.
Related Documentation
●Parts List (Mechanical ●Wiring Diagram
and Electrical wiring)

How to read operating instructions… 1
Easy-to-find Titles / Tag headlines/ Page number
Title
Major classification Minor classification Minor classification title
number number
Prepara-
Operating
Operating procedure
procedure
Preparations of the tray
2-4-2
2-3-1
tions
before
production feeder 1
Middle classification number Middle classification title When followed by

the same title
Tag headlines
Preparation
Major classification
Page number title
2 - 4 -2- 1
When multiple pages
Major・middle・minor have the same title
classification number
■About reference
(→P. 2 - 3 -1 )
Reference number
Symbol to show reference

Visual procedure/operation by reading
Operating procedure
Operation button
Contents of operation
Detach the
1 2 feeder cart. 3
SERVO (→P.3-2)
ENABLING
ON
Operation switch
Shows to turn in the Indicates to draw out to

direction of the arrow. the arrow direction.
Shows to push another switch or button

while holding down the ENABLING switch.
(Position of switches may vary)

How to read operating instructions… 2
Visual procedure/operation by reading
Operation mode button, press the button

that shows each level of operation.
Operation procedure
Shows to push the

1 A 2 operation button.
1
Shows to push another button
while holding down the
ENABLING switch.
2 +
(Completes continuous preparation.)
Shows the operation results.
A Run Results
● Homing axis
Screen explanation
Terms used in the button on the screen may differ from

Remarks the ones in explanation.

Table of Contents
11
Confirmation -1 Safety precautions
-2 Warning labels
-3 Safety management
-3-1 Safety switches / Key management /
Maintenance placard
-3-2 Stopping specifications when coupled
-3-3 Connecting a device or a conveyor
prepared by customer
-4 Precautions
-5 Handling the SD card and the
Product nameplate
-6 Disposing the gas spring
-7 Handling the used battery
-8 Repairs on or disposal of linear
motors
-9 Component names
-9-1 Appearance diagram/Operating units
-9-2 Operation switch
-9-3 Main units
NPM-D3 S-11 EJM6DE-CT-01N-00

2
Overview -1 Overview
-1-1 Maintenance overview
-1-2 Periodic inspection items by cycle
-1-3 Periodic inspection items by unit
-1-4 Periodic inspection items by applying grease
-1-5 Consumable parts
-1-6 Periodic inspection points by unit
-1-7 Part exchange due to limited-life
Tasks
3
-1 Greasing
-2 How to handle the feeder cart
related to (feeder cart: option)
-3
maintenance
Detaching and attaching the feeder
table cover
NPM-D3 S-12 EJM6DE-CT-01M-01

Periodic
4
-1 Before operation
-1-1 Inspecting the pressure gauge
inspection -1-2 Checking the dummy dispensing tape
Every-24-
(dispensing head: option)
-2 After operation
hours
-2-1 Cleaning the components-ejection box
-2-2 Cleaning the used-tape box
(feeder cart: option)
-2-3 Cleaning the refuse box
(tray feeder: option)
-2-4 Cleaning the wiping station (dispensing head:
option)
-2-5 Cleaning and checking the screw unit and the
nozzles (dispensing head: option)
-3 As needed
-3-1 Cleaning an inspecting the pallet
(fray feeder pallet: option)
5
Periodic -1 Cleaning the touchscreen
inspection -2 Cleaning the nozzle holder

(Light weight 16-/12-/8-nozzle head: option)
Every-140- -3 Cleaning the nozzle holder
hours
(2-nozzle head: option)
-4 Cleaning the PCB-support blocks

(for automatic change)(option)
-5 Cleaning the PCB-support blocks
(for batch exchange)(option)
-6 Cleaning the cover glass
(Multi-recognition camera)
-7 Cleaning the feeder table

(feeder cart: option)
-8 Cleaning the table surface

(tray feeder drawer: option)
-9 Cleaning the calibration jig

(2D inspection head : option)
-10 Cleaning and checking the dummy

dispensing plate

Periodic
6
-1 Greasing the PCB conveyor
-2 Greasing the conveyor L,
Inspection conveyor R(option)
-3
Every-560-
Greasing the XY-axis linear
guide
-4
hours
Greasing the nozzle holder
-5 Cleaning the nozzle (option) and
the nozzle changer (option)
-6 Inspecting the conveyor
-7 Cleaning the large reflector
(2-nozzle head: option)
-8 Cleaning the vacuum pump
filter
-9 Inspecting the safety switches
-10 Cleaning the PCB detection
sensors
-11 Inspecting the vacuum air path
(placement head: option)
-12 Inspecting the θ-axis belt
(placement head: option)
-13 Cleaning the components-
ejection conveyor(option)
-14 Greasing to the tray feeder
(option)
-15 Cleaning the slot
(tray feeder magazine: option)
-16 Cleaning the safety cover
-17 Inspecting the air drain
(regulator unit)
-18 Cleaning the light-emitting and
light-receiving sections
(height sensor: option)
-19 Greasing the dispensing head
(option)
-20 Greasing the dummy
dispensing unit (dispensing head:
option)
-21 Cleaning the nozzle (option) and
nozzle changer (option) for
support pins
7
Periodic -1 Cleaning the filter (main controller)
-2 Cleaning the filter (power unit 1)
inspection -3 Cleaning the air filter of the FA
Every- computer (inspection box: option)
-4 Replacing the O-ring
3000-hours (dispensing head: option)
-5 Replacing the collar

-6 Adjusting white balance
(2D inspection head: Option)
Periodic
8 -1 Inspecting the backlight
(touchscreen)
inspection -2 Applying grease to the hinge
Every- 6000-
(touchscreen)
-3 Inspecting the 1006 nozzle (option)

hours -4 Greasing the y-axis sliding plate
Periodic
9
-1 Inspecting the nozzle holder (option)
-2
inspection
Inspecting the cable bearer (XY unit)
-3 Replacing the spring
Every-18000- (dispensing head: option)
-4 Replacing the heater/thermocouple

hours (dispensing head: option)
Replacement
10
-1 Head and nozzle changer
replacement
-2 Mode switch
-2-1 Switching to the single lane mode
-2-2 Confirming switch
-3 Attachment without head
-4 Feeder cart switch unit

11
Consumable -1 Replacing the transfer belt of the
parts
PCB transfer conveyor
-2 Replacing the transfer belt of the
replacement conveyor L , the conveyor R (option)
-3 Replacing the batteries
-4 Replacing the dummy dispensing
tape(dispensing head: option)
-5 Replacing the cushion (wiping
station) (dispensing head: option)
-6 Replacing the air filter element of the
placement head (Light weight 16-nozzle)
placement head (12-nozzle)

12
Calibration -1 Overview
-1-1 Calibration performance
-1-2 Calibration item and action
-1-3 Jigs used for calibration
-1-4 Explanation of screen
-2 Head camera XY origin
-3 Plane correction XY
-4 Head / Plane correction Z
-5 Width adjustment
-6 Placement position/Conveyor
-7 Height sensor (option)
-8 Placement load
-8-1 Placement load
-8-2 How to use placement load measurement jig
(option)
-9 Multi-recognition camera
-10 Jig station
-11 Dispensing head
-12 White balance (2D inspection head)
-13 Camera offset (2D inspection head)
-14 Image quality correction (2D
inspection head)
-15 Inspection plane correction (2D
inspection head)
-16 Pickup position
-17 Tray
-18 Transfer
-19 Accuracy verification
-19-1 Overview
-19-2 Detailed process

Installation
13
-1 Before installation
-2 Transportation
-3 Installation
-4 Main power connection
Checking voltages of the primary power supply
-4-1 and the machine
-4-2 Connection of the main power supply
Adjusting voltages of the primary power supply
-4-3 and the machine
Connection of air source and power
-5 supply
-6 Peripheral device connection
-6-1 Line configuration
-6-2 Line signal specifications
-6-3 Connection of the conveyor L
-6-4 Connection of the conveyor R
-6-5 Ethernet cables LWS (line work station)
-6-6 Cable length
-6-7 Settings when connected to LNB
-7 PCB transfer settings
(when connected to non-NPM-D3 equipment)
-8 How to handle the tray feeder
(option)
-9 2D inspection head (option)
-10 Attaching and detaching the safety
cover (option)
Others
14
-1 Machine information
-2 Update
-2-1 Updating the machine system
-2-2 Updating the firmware
-3 Option license
-4 Common parameters
15
Reference -1 Plastic parts listing
-2 Safety data sheet (SDS)

1 Confirmation
1
1-1 Safety precautions 1
Precautions that must be observed in order to prevent injury to the user or other persons, and damage to
property are described below.
 The degree of danger or injury resulting from incorrect usage are classified and described as follows.
Indicates an imminently hazardous situation that could
DANGER result in death, severe bodily injury or major property

damage.
WARNING Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that could result

in death, severe bodily injury or property damage.
CAUTION Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that could result

in minor or moderate injury and property damage.
 Precautions that must be observed are classified by the symbols shown and described below.
(The followings are examples of symbols)
Indicates actions that must not be carried out.
Indicates actions that must be carried out.
Indicates matters to which attention must be paid.
Indicates that you must read the manual.
NPM-D3 1-1-1 EJM6DE-SF-01N-01

Be sure to observe the following
Confirmation
DANGER
To prevent
Emergency stop switch
injury or (Located in front and rear)
burn…
If you sense any danger or abnormalities,

press the emergency stop switch to stop
operation (If you continue to operate the machine in a dangerous
or abnormal state, an accident will occur)
●When you push the emergency stop switch, the

machine stops.
●Push the nearest emergency stop switch (two
locations). Either switch stops the machine.
[How to reset]
When you are ready to restart operation, turn the
emergency stop switch clockwise and pull out after
checking and clearing any danger or abnormalities.
Front side ■For several machines connected

Machine
stops ●The machine located on the right side seen from
Machine the machine front also stops along with the one on
does not stop which the emergency stop switch is pushed. Other
machines do not stop. (See the picture above)
Once the emergency

stop switch has been
pushed

DANGER
Do not disable safety

switches
(Risk of injury)
●When safety switches on safety convers
are activated during operation , the Safety switches
machine stops. (Rear side : Under safety
Safety switch cover)
(Rear side: Under Safety switches
feeder table cover) (Front side: Under safety
cover)
Safety switch
(Front side: Under
feeder table covers)
Replenish-section
open/close switch
●It has a function of
safety switch
●Installed under the
cover
Safety switch
(In the magazine
Single tray feeder door)

Confirmation
Observe the following when placing any part
of your body into a moving part of the machine
(Risk of electric shock/Risk of injury if the machine is actuated)
Please handle according to your task.
●When repairing control units ON
→Cut off the power supply of the factory that
the machine is connected to.
OFF
ON
●When performing periodic inspection or exchanging

control parts such as consumable parts, sensors or
head units OFF
→Turn off the main power supply switch and lock out
the machine.
●When performing changeovers or daily

OFF ON
maintenance, installing nozzles to the nozzle changer,
placing a PCB on or removing it from the conveyor,
performing maintenance of the inside of the machine
→Turn off the servo switch and open the safety cover.
Servo switch
(Located in front and
rear)
Main power switch

(Located in front)

DANGER
These are what should be followed when handling the linear motor.
Individuals with Do not

pacemakers should disassemble the
keep away from the linear motors
(Risk of injury due to strong attraction of
linear motor stators: magnets)
(Risk of injury)
Be careful not to
Do not wear or touch the linear
approach any motor’s mover
metal during work (Risk of burn)
(Risk of injury when your hands are ●The temperature of the mover rises
pinched or pulled in due to the strong high (80 degrees in a temperature of
magnetic force of the linear motor) 25 degrees, 90 degrees in a
temperature of 35 degrees.)
●Pierced earrings , necklaces, watches ●After shutdown, it may need three
and tools hours or more before they reach room
temperature.
Y-axis upper stator

X-axis stator (magnet)
(magnet) Y-axis lower stator
(magnet)
X-axis linear motor
●Located in front
and rear Mover ●Located in right
Mover
Y-axis linear motor

Confirmation
WARNING
To prevent
injury or Shut off power
electric before performing
shock… maintenance work
(Risk of injury or electric shock)
●When you shut off the power source,

the air source is automatically shut
off in conjunction.
●Lock the main power supply switch
with the padlock.
●Put a maintenance e placard during
maintenance.
Be aware of
possibility of
electric shock to
the primary line
during
maintenance work
(Risk of electric shock)
●Even if the main power supply is
turned OFF, the power is still
supplied to its primary line.
Primary line
(The power is being supplied)
Main terminal Main power supply switch
L1
L2
L3
PE

WARNING
Take care not to punch
Do not operate the your hand
machine without (Risk of injury)
receiving special ●This graphic symbol, a warning label, is
training put on parts which contain the potential
risk of squeezing hands.
(Risk of injury due to uncontrolled or ●Direct particular attention to any of the
incorrect motion of the machine caused following.
by improper operation) ・When closing the cover.
・When adjusting the width between
●Contact us about training. rails manually or automatically.
・When moving XY table, the head and
the axis by hand.
Take care not to Be sure to ground the
touch hot surfaces machine
(Risk of burns) (Risk of electric shock or leak)
●Consult a professional electrical
●This graphic symbol, a warning label, contractor.
is put on parts which may increase in
temperature. Do not touch an electrified
●They may remain heated even after part with conductive
stopping operation. materials such as a wire
●Current-carrying parts including the
Take care not to connector and the terminal.
receive an electric Do not place your hands or
shock (Risk of electric shock) body into the moving parts
of the machine even while
●This graphic symbol, a warning label,
is put on parts which carry the
the machine is stopped
potential risk of electrical shock. (Risk of injury)
●When the machine is in single stop or
cycle stop state, moving parts of the
machine may start running unexpectedly
Do not put your if the sensors are activated.
hands in the When moving an feeder
openings between cart, pay careful attention
feeders installed to your surroundings
(Risk of injury due to the contact with (Risk of injury due to crashing into
people)
the moving part inside the machine)
●We recommend installing all feeders
Be careful not to get your
so that you will not accidentally put fingers or hands caught
your hands into the machine. (Risk of injury)
●This graphic symbol, a warning label, is
put on parts which contain the potential
risk of catching fingers or hands.
Feeder
mounting Do not touch the cutter part
area or the sheet-metal edge
part of the feeder
(Risk of cutting fingers or hands)

Confirmation
CAUTION
To prevent
injury or Do not put any
electric objects around
shock… emergency stop
switches
(Risk of an accident due to being
unable to press the switch to stop the
machine in case of emergency)
Do not climb on equipment,

peripheral devices and
moving parts
(Cause of damage by load or injury by
failing or being stuck in the equipment)
●Covers, the feeder cart and inspection
box.
Observe the precautions Do not apply any impact to
described in the Product’s motors or other electrical
[Material Safety Data Sheet] equipment
(Risk of electric shock, cause of electrical
(Cause of injury or damage by chemical leakage)
substances) ●Motor or control boxes.
●Material Safety Data Sheets can be found
in the [Maintenance manual]. Wear a cloth hat or helmet
and protective goggles
Handle the feeder carefully
during maintenance work
when carrying it (Risk of injury)
(Risk of injury/backache due to dropping) ●Motor or control boxes.
●Handle properly in accordance with the
manual.

WarningClabels 1
1-2
Follow the instructions on labels on the locations below.
If it has come off, place an order with us for it, referring to its label No. in the Parts List; then, put the new one
on the proper location.
Danger labels
■NPM-D3 main unit
Front side
On the feeder table cover
●The labels are attached to the inside of the machine.
PD0101M1

Confirmation
■Tray feeder
Operator side
PD0101M1

Warning labels 2
1-2
Warning labels
■NPM-D3 main unit
Front side

Confirmation
Rear side

WarningClabels 3
1-2
Warning labels
■NPM-D3 main unit
Right side
●The labels are attached to the inside of the machine.
Left side ●The labels are attached to the inside of the machine.

Confirmation
Right side
Left side

WarningClabels 4
1-2
Caution labels
■NPM-D3 main unit
Front side
In front of the multi-recognition camera
Rear side
In front of the multi-recognition camera

Confirmation
Warning labels
■X-axis and Y-axis linear motor
Front side

WarningClabels 5
1-2
Warning labels
■Feeder cart
Operator side

Confirmation
■Tray feeder
Operator side
Right side
Built-in monitor

Warning labels 6
1-2
Danger labels / Warning labels
■Conveyor L (N-CONL)
Front side
PD0101M1

Confirmation
■Conveyor R (N-CONR)
Front side
PD0101M1

WarningClabels 7
1-2
Warning labels
■Multifunctional transfer unit

Front side
■Support station box ■Power supply unit
Front side Front side
●It is attached on the right side of the unit.

Confirmation
■Dispensing head
■Inspection box

Warning labels 8
1-2
Warning labels
■Safety cover
Front side
Safety cover
Rear side
Feeder cart specification Tray feeder specification

Confirmation

Safety Safety switches /
Key management /
1-3-1 manage-
ment Maintenance placard
Safety switches
Safety covers on the machine are equipped with safety switches. In the event that either front or rear of the
safety cover is opened accidentally during automatic production, the machine will come to an emergency
stop to ensure the safety of the operators.
Safety covers
●Before starting automatic production, ensure that all safety covers are closed.
●When material replenishment is needed, a message will be displayed on the screen instructing you which
corresponding cover can be opened to replenish the materials.
Servo Switch
●When working inside the machine like performing changeovers or maintenance tasks, be sure to turn OFF
the servo switch on the side that is being worked on to ensure operator safety.
●If the servo switch is turned OFF, all axes will be disabled.
●Before starting production, verify whether the servo switches on the front and rear control panel have been
turned ON.
Key management
When you encounter a section in the manuals that reads [Turn off the main power supply as well as
stopping air supply], a lock is needed. The key for the lock should be managed by a trained person,
according to the customer’s management standard.
■Locking/Unlocking procedure
Lock plate
1 Rotate the knob to left to the position
where marks on the lock plate and the
1 case match.
2 Push in the lock plate.

3 2
3 Turn the knob to [OFF] position with
Knob holding the lock plate.
key 4
Mark on the
case
4 Put the padlock through the center
φ5 to φ8 hole to lock.
Lock plate
Lock 5 Place the maintenance placard
indicating maintenance work in
progress.
30 to 50 mm Placard
NPM-D3 1-3-1-1 EJM6DE-SF-01N-01

Confirmation
Maintenance placard
Before performing maintenance, affix the included maintenance placard (see below) to prominent positions in
the vicinity of the operating panel, for safety. During maintenance by two or more persons in particular, in
addition to using these warning sheets to ensure safety, be sure to send signals to each other.
●This maintenance placard uses a magnet. Do not use it or
store it near magnetic media or any other items susceptible
to magnetic influence.
NPM-D3 1-3-1-2 EJM6DE-SF-01N-01

Safety Stopping specifications
1-3-2 manage-
ment when coupled
Main body cover
STOP switch
Feeder
Feeder table cover Emergency stop
switch
Main power supply

Pick-up section switch
opening sensor
■When three machines are coupled
Internal opening
Conveyor L sensor Conveyor R
3 1 2 4
NPM-D3 NPM-D3 NPM-D3 External opening
External opening
sensor A B C sensor
NPM-D3 1-3-2-1 EJM6DE-SF-01N-01

Confirmation
With three machines (A, B and C) coupled together, A and C perform the operations shown in the
following table once the safety device for B works. ○: Operable ×: Inoperable
A B C
○ The emergency stop switch is ON ×*1)
○ The main power supply switch is OFF ○

×*1) The feeder table cover is open ×*1)
×*2) The internal opening sensor 1 (left) is ON ○
○ The internal opening sensor 2 (right) is ON ×*2)
○ The main-body cover is open ○

○ The pick-up section opening sensor is ON ○
○ The feeder cart is detached ○
○ The STOP switch is ON ○
*1) If the emergency stop switch is ON or a feeder table cover is detached and XY unit is started up
while the main power turns OFF, servo OFF error appears. If this error appears, reset an
emergency stop switch or close the feeder table cover.
*2) And when the external opening sensors ( 3 and 4 ) for the conveyor L and conveyor R are
ON, A, B and C perform the operations shown in the following table.
○: Operable ×: Inoperable
Conveyor L A B C Conveyor R
When the external opening When the external opening

sensor 3 is ON
× ○ ○ sensor 4 is OFF
When the external opening When the external opening

sensor 3 is OFF
○ ○ × sensor 4 is ON
NPM-D3 1-3-2-2 EJM6DE-SF-01N-01

Safety Connecting a device or a
conveyor prepared by
1-3-3 manage-
ment customer
The NPM-D3 has a PCB transfer opening on the left and right sides. Since the front and rear heads in the
machine move within the area shown below at high-speed, it is very dangerous if you insert your hands into
the machine. If you couple a device or a conveyor prepared on your own, be sure to provide safety
measures.
Front side Rear side
804 mm
794 mm
103 mm
110 mm
Head movable area
77.5 mm 173.5 mm
NPM-D3 1-3-3-1 EJM6DE-SF-01N-01

Confirmation
NOTICE
●Be sure to connect the device or the conveyor satisfied the machine safety requirements such as
ISO13849-1 or IEC6201.
●Keep the safety distance of 600 mm or more from the opening in order not to reach hands into the
opening of the NPM-D3 from the adjacent device or conveyor. (Reference (1))
●If you can keep only the safety distance of 400 to 600 mm from the opening of the NPM-D3, install the
safety sensor on the PCB transfer opening, and output the safety support signal to the NPM-D3.
(Reference (2))
●Take measures not to insert hands or fingers from the space between the NPM-D3 and the device or
the conveyor.
●Install the full cover that usually you cannot open or close, to the transfer rail of the device or the
conveyor.
If you can reach the PCB transfer opening with the open/close cover installed, install the safety switch,
and output the safety support signal to the NPM-D3 while the cover is open. When the cover is open,
the NPM-D3 stops for confirming safety.(Reference (3))
●About detailed conditions regarding machine safety or safety about connection with machines
manufactured by us (CM series), please ask us.
PCB transfer opening PCB transfer opening

(3) Full cover
●Safety switch is required
for the open/close cover
Peripheral Peripheral equipment

equipment (placement machine)
(conveyor) (1) 600mm or more (1) 600mm or more
(2) If the space is only 400 to (2) If the space is only 400
600 mm, the transfer to 600 mm, the transfer
opening sensor is opening sensor is
necessary necessary
NPM-D3 1-3-3-2 EJM6DE-SF-01N-01

1-4 Precautions 1
Precautions in use
●Do not move noise sources such as welders close to equipment. A malfunction may occur.
●During the operation of equipment, avoid turning OFF the power switch of the main controller, the servo
switch and the air unnecessarily.
Because equipment operates independently without being controlled, breakage may occur.
●During instruction or when moving a unit manually with the servo free from stress, be sure that there is no
interference. Breakage may occur.
●The tray feeder cover is locked with a cylinder. Forcing open the cover may cause breakage of the cover
or the cylinder.
●Do not take apart or alter the main body of equipment or the unit. It may affect the level of safety and
quality control of products.
●Data should only be changed by authorized personnel, who have received special training.
A malfunction may occur due to improper input.
●Do not block the fan outlet and inlet. Abnormal action arising from the increase in temperature inside the
control box may occur.
●Do not turn OFF the servo switch during operation. It may cause machine to malfunction. Turn it OFF
when the machine is in a temporary stop state (single stop or cycle stop) or operation stop state.
●When the nebulizer or the humidifier are used, be aware of quality of water. Especially using the ultrasonic
humidifier, calcium and magnesium of components of hardness, and silica, carbonate and iron are
discharged in the air depending on quality of water. Adhesion of power dust to the machine can cause
sliding or optical dysfunctions.
●Do not use the machine in the environment that low molecular weight siloxane is found due to gasification
of silicon materials (silicone adhesive, silicone oil and silicone power.)
Adhesion of low molecular weight siloxane to the electrical contact part or optical part of the machine can
cause contact or functional defects.
●We have no responsibility regarding the followings.
・ Improper usage, and trouble and damage due to inappropriate repair or remodel
・ Accidental damage arising from the machine use or fail such as loss of business interests, or change
or deletion of memory data
・ Trouble or damage caused by relocation, transportation or drop of the machine after purchased
・ Trouble or damage caused by fire, an earthquake, flood damage, lighting strike or any other act of
providence, and environmental pollution, salt pollution, gas pollution (Corrosive gas and halogen gas),
abnormal voltage and power supplies, other than specified (voltage, frequency)
・ Trouble and damage arising when transported by vehicles and ships
・ Damage arisen from not being observed described matters in the manuals included in this product

Confirmation
Precautions for Maintenance and Inspection
■Follow the instruction manual when engaged in maintenance or
inspection.
●Refer to the Operating procedure and the Maintenance, which come with equipment, for maintenance and
inspection.
●Turn OFF the main power switch and the pneumatic source (cock) before maintenance or inspection.
Locking is recommended to ensure your safety.
●When cleaning parts of the equipment not mentioned in the instruction manual, wipe with a soft dry cloth.
For dirty spots, dampen a cloth with a neutral detergent diluted with water, and wipe the spots after
wringing out the wet cloth.
After cleaning with the damp cloth, dry with a dry cloth.
●When cleaning inside the clean room, use cleaning implements provided for the clean room.
●Do not use an organic solvent or the like because it contributes to the following.
・Cracking or deterioration of plastic parts
・Rapid decline in antistatic effect
■Clean the area around equipment when the equipment is not in use.
When cleaning equipment, be sure to turn the power source off and
do not use an air gun.
●The unit and products may be exposed to dust, thereby causing adverse influence on equipment and
products.
Security precautions
●Machine password is not set as default. Please set a password after the machine is delivered to you.
●After performing operation that password entry is required, change the mode to the normal mode
(Operator mode.)
●Connect the machine, LNB and NPM-DGS to intranet before use.
●Keep your password safe and should not disclose it to any other person.
●When you send or dispose of the computer used for the LNB or NPM-DGS, remove the hard disk or
initialize it.
●When an SD card is used in emergency operation such as network error, delete the data in the SD card
after returning to normal operation.
●Recorded information on the SD card may not be completely deleted by the basic function of the
operation system. We recommend to use commercial software that can delete the data completely.
●If you do not follow above precautions, you may crack a user ID, your password or your production
data by the third parity with knowledge.

1-4 Precautions 2
Handling of linear motors

■Keep magnetic bodies such as iron (e.g. tools, jigs, and bolts),
watches, cellular phones, and magnetic cards 40 mm away from the
linear motors.
●Depending on the shapes of magnetic bodies, they may not be able to be detached from each
other. Such as small parts can be removed by hand. (There is no problem if you touch the
permanent magnets with bare hands.)
●Due to extreme powerful magnetic force, watches and cellular phones may be broken and data of
magnetic cards may be corrupted.

Confirmation
Handling of the scanner (option)
The wired and wireless scanners comply with IEC60825-1 Class2 laser product.
■Do not peer into the alignment beam from the scan window.
●The eyes may be damaged by the alignment beam (laser beam).
●When there are changes in subject, the alignment beam is emitted automatically.
And then, when there are no change in it for two seconds, the alignment beam stop emission.
Alignment beam
(Shape of irradiated subject)
■Do not emit the alignment beam toward other peoples’ eyes.
●The eyes may be damaged by the alignment beam (laser beam).
■Do not disassemble the scanner.

●The alignment beam is emitted to your eyes when it is disassembled. The eyes may be damaged.
■Keep the connector on the NPM-D3 main unit connected as possible

except when necessary.
●If you frequently mate/unmate the connector on the NPM-D3 main body, communication trouble may occur.
●If you connect/disconnect the connector by necessity, be sure to turn OFF the machine power.
Wired scanner Wireless scanner

1-4 Precautions 3
Handling of motors
●In order to prevent the components being picked up from falling, the vacuum pump motor is designed
not to stop even if the emergency stop switch is pressed.
Rear side
Vacuum pump
(Inside of the machine)
●When the emergency stop switch is pushed, the following motors are stop.
・X-axis and Y-axis motors
・Head Z-axis and θ-axis motors
・Conveyor motor
・Width adjustment motor
Handling of connectors
●The following connectors do not cut off the power.
・Power connector for the CPU BOX
・Power connector for trays
・Power connector for the Inspection BOX

Confirmation
Handling of the height sensor 1
■Never look it into directly.

●The height sensor complies with the class 1 (IEC60825-1) level of the laser safety standard, so it is
basically safe under the normal use. Do not directly look into during maintenance or operation.
■Height sensor specifications

●The height sensor can be installed to the front and rear of the X-unit on the machine.
Output of laser elements is maximum of 220 μW. The sensor head does not have mechanism to stop
emission of the laser beam when disassembled. If disassembled, you may be exposed by laser radiation.
Never disassemble the sensor head.
Item Laser specifications
Manufacturer Panasonic Factory Solutions Co., Ltd.
Model N610112849AA
number
Wavelength 655 nm
Output 220 μW
Class Class 1
Installation See below
position
Regulation IEC60825-1 2007

1-4 Precautions 4
Handling of the height sensor 2
■Laser class label affixed on the unit

The following label is affixed to the machine with the height sensor installed.
Front side Height sensor
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
(Inner body)
Rear side

Confirmation
Handling of the feeder cart 1
Make sure to observe the following precautions before handling the

feeder cart to ensure its safe and proper use.
■Do not hold the handles of loaded tape feeders or the feeder table when
carrying the feeder cart. Doing so can deform the feeders’ handles or
the table mounting bracket.
Guide pipe
Tape feeder Feeder table Handle bar
●Raise the handle bar and make sure that its guide pipe fits tightly into place.
●Use the dedicated handle bar when you move the feeder cart.

1-4 Precautions 5
Handling of the feeder cart 2

■Do not place anything other than tape feeders on the cart. Also, you
should not lean against, sit on or step onto the cart as it could deform
the cart , or cause bolt loosening.
■Do not leave the loaded tape feeders pulled out. the cart may be
deformed.
● After pulling out the feeders, slide them
back into positions promptly.
Tape feeder

Confirmation
Handling of the change cart switch unit 1
●Be careful enough in handling the change cart switch unit drive because it weighs 20kg ; be sure to use
the switching cart when handling it.
Handle
●While handling the change cart switch unit

drive, hold its handles with your both hands.
Change cart switch unit drive Switching cart
●Whenever attaching or detaching the change

cart switch unit drive, lock the two stoppers on
the switching cart.
Switching cart stopper
●When moving the change cart switch unit

drive, be sure to use the switching cart.
Change cart switch unit drive
Switching cart

1-4 Precautions 6
Handling of the change cart switch unit 2
■The change cart switch unit should be stored in such a place as it will not
be bumped accidentally.
●Change cart switch unit drive
■In carrying the drawer connector extension unit, use both hands because
you may be injured if dropping it.
●Drawer connector extension unit

Confirmation

Handling of the SD card
1-5 and the Product nameplate
Handling of SD card
■SD memory card available in the machine (Recommended)
Capacity Product number (Panasonic brand)
SD memory card 2GB RP-SDP02GJ1K (As of August 2010)
・The product number is subject to change without notice.
memory cards are not supported.
NOTICE ●SDHC
●SD cards can save a maximum of 235 items, regardless of memory capacity.
(SD cards with a capacity of 64MB can save a maximum of 200 items.
●The available card capacity is from 64MB to 2GB.
●Defect SD cards may contribute to malfunction. In case of malfunction, insert and remove
cards again.
■Write protection
It is possible to mechanically protect the stored data from an accidental deletion or overwrite.
“Released” position “Protected” position

Enables deleting and saving. Disables deleting and saving.
■Handling precautions
●Avoid severe shock, bending, dropping or exposure to water.
●Avoid placing heavy objects on the disk.
●Avoid applying excessive force to the disk.
●Do not touch metal terminals by hand or metal objects.
●Do not remove affixed labels.
●Do not affix seals or labels overlapped.
●Avoid storing or leaving in areas exposed to the following conditions.
・High or low temperature
・High humidity
・Dusty
・Direct sunlight
・Corrosive gas
●Avoid using cases not specifically provided for storage and carrying.
●While the drive access lamp (→ P.1-9-1-2) is lit, avoid ejecting SD card or turning off the power supply.
●To prevent your PC from being infected by illegal software, conduct a virus check on your PC before
inserting and removing SD cards.
●SD cards may heat up after long hours of use, which does not cause failures.
●You may not be able to write to, and erase data from, SD cards that, if used for long periods, reach the end
of their life.
●We accept no responsibility for any damage caused by erasing data.

Confirmation
Type of SD cards
■Key disk (Engineer)
Used when a password on each mode is changed.
●Key disk is required to set a password. Keep it in a safe place so you cannot lose it.
●Please contact us in case of loss.
■Installation disk
Used when software is stored and upgraded.
■Parameter disk
Used in saving production data and machine parameters as examples.
Product nameplate
The Product nameplate indicating the product name (Model ID) and serial number of the machine is affixed at
the following location.
Rear side
NPM-D3
NM-EJM6D



 







 is replaced with a numeric value.

Disposing the gas
1-6 spring
The gas spring is used to open/close covers. It is very dangerous to dispose of it as it is, because high-
pressure air is sealed into it. When disposing a gas spring, be sure to degas before disposed.
To remove or dispose, please send a request to the gas spring manufacturer.
■Locations where the gas spring is used
Front side
Hexagon socket
head cap screw
Gas spring
Hexagon socket
head cap screw
(4 locations)
■Removing gas spring

Turn the hexagon socket head cap screws counterclockwise and remove the spring.
●Two men should work as a team. The unintentional closing of the cover could cause injury.
■Disposing gas spring

Make a hole with the drill and degas completely inside the gas spring.
15 to 20 mm
Drilled hole
CAUTION
Wear a hard hat and protective goggles
during maintenance work
(Risk of injury)
NPM-D3 1-6 EJM6DE-SF-01N-01

Handling the used
1-7 battery
Confirmation
ATTENTION
EU This product has a battery used for controlling PCBs. Disposal may be regulated in your
community due to environmental considerations. Please dispose of or recycle it in conformity
with the laws or regulations of your country, or contact your local authorities for more
information.
No. Mount location Battery type Reference page
1. CPU board Lithium battery
2. NCIO board Lithium battery
3. Jig station Alkaline battery [Replacing the batteries]

(→P.11-3) in Maintenance
FA PC：Calendar
4. battery（inspection Lithium battery
BOX）
FA PC：UPS
5. battery（inspection Nickel hydride
BOX）
●Lithium batteries are primary batteries that cannot be recharged.

●Although manganese dioxide batteries are acceptable, alkaline batteries are recommended.
●Batteries are not included with Jig station. Please have your batteries ready.
●FA PC：Please consult us for replacing calendar battery.
NPM-D3 1-7 EJM6DE-SF-01N-01

Repairs on or disposal of
1-8 linear motors
■TO THE CUSTOMER･･･

Entrust to a
waste disposal
expert for
removal or
disassemble!
You are prohibited to remove or disassemble
the linear motor on your own
Using a special jig, trained personnel have to disassemble or dispose of the linear motor.
Please entrust to a waste disposal expert or contact us.
Submit this page and the next page to a waste disposal

expert when disposing
When disposing of the linear motor, the waste disposal expert has to be informed of the disposal
procedures to prevent a waste disposal accident.
Removal and disposal
1 Remove combustible materials (resin parts or wirings

near the linear motor) (Prevents from fire)
Demagnetize the linear motor
2 ●Evenly apply heat to the surface of the linear motor’s stator (permanent magnet) with an acetylene
gas burner for more than five minutes, with the surface temperature kept at approximately
1,000°C.
3 Confirm that the magnetic force is reduced

●Confirm that the magnetic force is 10 mT or less, or check to see whether the steel scale is not
strongly attracted.
4 Dispose of it as industrial waste
Danger
Do not wear or close to any metal during work (Risk of injury when your hands are
pinched or pulled in due to the strong magnetic force of the linear motor)
●Pierced earrings, necklaces, watches and tools
Individuals with Pacemakers should keep away from the linear motor
(Risk of injury)

Confirmation
Position of a liner motor
X-axis stator
(magnet)
Y-axis upper
stator (magnet)
Y-axis lower
stator (magnet)
X-axis liner motor Y-axis liner motor
Precautions in use
●The attractive force generated by the stator (permanent magnet) is very strong. (it varies depending on the
axis and it is 10 000 at the maximum). Once one stator is stuck to another or a thick steel sheet, they cannot
be detached from each other easily.
●A magnetic body (e.g. tool, jig, or bolt), such as iron, or a device, including a watch, cellular phone, or
magnetic card, should be kept 40 mm away from the linear motor. (It results in serious injury when the stator
attracts the magnetic body and then your finger or hand is caught between them/The strong magnetic force
may damage the watch or the cellular phone and destroy the data on the magnetic card)
●Only the stator has an attractive force. (The mover does not have an attractive force)
■Structure of the linear motor (reference)

●The structure may differ slightly from one model to
Be careful
another, but basically it is the same in each model. of magnetic
Iron core
Coil Mover
force!
(Maximum force
of 10 000 N)
Stator

Com- Appearance
1-9-1 ponent
names diagram/Operating units
Appearance diagram
Front side
Component empty lamp
Light OFF: Normal run
Light ON: Components have
run out
Flashing: Shortage of component
Touchscreen (Front)
Safety cover (Front)
Regulator cover (Front)
Various pressure gauges
Rear side
Safety cover (Rear)
Touchscreen (Rear)
Cover (Rear)
NPM-D3 1-9-1-1 EJM6DE-SF-01N-01

Confirmation
Signal tower
Red: Illuminates when you push emergency stop switch or in case
of error stop.
Yellow: Illuminates in case of material shortage.
Green: Illuminates in automatic operation.
Red: Illuminates when you push emergency stop switch or in case

of error stop.
●You can change the above setting. (→ [Operation Edition P.7-1-3)
●Please refer to the [Operating Procedure] (→ P.7-2-4)
●The signal tower is placed sideways when shipped , however the angle can be adjusted.
Operating units
Front and
rear sides
Various operation
switches
Controls operation start / stop.
Servo switch
Turns ON/OFF the power of servo
units.
Stops operation immediately
Main power supply

switch (Front side)
Turns ON/OFF the power and air
supply.(When you turn off the
power supply switch, the air
supply is shut off also.)
SD card reader
Reading and writing of
programming data.
Access lamp
(Green LED)
NPM-D3 1-9-1-2 EJM6DE-SF-01N-01

Com-
Operation switch
1-9-2 ponent
names
START
Starts production.
●Restarts production when in
temporary stop.
●Push the button with
at the same time
Front and
rear sides
NPM-D3 1-9-2-1 EJM6DE-SF-01N-01

Confirmation
SELECT
To enable the operation switch
in front or rear, and the
touchscreen operation.
●The light is on if it is enabled.
ENABLING
Holding down the switch,
press the touchscreen’s
operation button or the switch
to operate the machine.
(For risk prevention)
STOP
To suspend production (single
stop) or to stop operations
accompanied by action.
OPTION
Backup used in adding
functions.
●Not in use for the standard.
EXCHANGE
To install/remove feeder carts.
●The light is on if it is
replaceable.
SERVO switch
Turns ON / OFF the motor
power supply.
（Conversion to disable
machine operation commands)
●Turns on when you start
production.
●Be sure to turn off before
placing your hands into the
moving parts of the machine.
Stops the machine immediately
●Turn it clockwise and return it
to the original position to
release.
( Total 2 switches in front and
rear)
Emergency Released
stop state state
NPM-D3 1-9-2-2 EJM6DE-SF-01N-01

Com-
Main units 1
1-9-3 ponent
names
PCB conveyor
Loads, clamps or
unloads PCBs.
PCB holder
Keeps back side of a PCB
with the support blocks and
pins.。
Supply unit ●The supply types of the rear side varies depending on machine specifications.。
Supplies components to be placed.
Single tray feeder Feeder cart

(Rear side) (Front and rear sides)
NPM-D3 1-9-3-1 EJM6DE-SF-01N-01

Confirmation
Placement head
The nozzles are picked up
components at the component
supply position and components are
mounted on a PCB.
●Light weight16-/12-/8-/2-nozzle
head is available.
Y-axis
drive unit
Drives the nozzle
head Y-direction.
X-axis
drive unit
Drives the nozzle
head X direction.
Feeder table cover

Ensures safety for hazardous
source inside of the machine
when the machine starts up.
Multi- Nozzle changer unit

recognition Stores or exchanges
camera unit nozzles.
Recognizes
components.
Light weight16-/12-
8-nozzle head 2-nozzle head
nozzle head
NPM-D3 1-9-3-2 EJM6DE-SF-01N-01

Com-
Main units 2
1-9-3 ponent
names
Wiping off station

(option)
Wipes the excess of adhesive
off for the tip of the
dispensing nozzle for the stain
prevention to the inside of
the main unit.
Safety cover (option)

This cover is for ensuring safety by stopping up the
opening in the
machine when the cart or the tray feeder is
unnecessary.
●The safety cover for a rear cover has two types; a
normal safety cover and a safety cover for tray feeder
specification.
■Front side
Inspection box
■Rear side
(option)
Reads, processes,
and recognizes the
image of the
inspection-target
PCB captured by
the inspection head
and outputs the
inspection result.
Feeder cart specification Tray feeder specification
NPM-D3 1-9-3-3 EJM6DE-SF-01N-01

Confirmation
Dispensing head
Applies adhesive to PCBs with high
accuracy at the high speed.
2D inspection head
Captures the condition of the
inspection-target PCB, and outputs
the captured image to the inspection
box.
●There are two types: the one with
pixel resolutions of 18μm (type A)
and the other with 9 μm (type B).
Calibration jig for the 2D

inspection 2D
An optical reference plate used
in calibration of the 2D
inspection head.
Dummy dispensing unit

Rolls up the dummy tape during dummy dispensing.
NPM-D3 1-9-3-4 EJM6DE-SF-01N-01

NPM-D3 1-9-3-5 EJM6DE-SF-01N-01
2 Overview
Maintenance
Over- Maintenance overview
2-1-1 view
●This equipment notifies you of the time for periodic maintenance, automatically calculating it from operating
time.
● When you notify the machine that a particular maintenance task is complete, the task completion is saved
in the history. (This information serves as the new reference to calculate the next maintenance timing.)
Equipment Screen (Alarm) Work
Operating time since

the last maintenance is Normal display
accumulated
80 % of the A flashing yellow

Confirmation of task
maintenance colored message is
details
cycle has elapsed… displayed
Full maintenance cycle

A flashing red colored
has elapsed and Perform maintenance
message is displayed
maintenance is due
The next maintenance

timing is automatically Normal display Update history
calculated
Operating time is
accumulated
NPM-D3 2-1-1-1 EJM6DE-MB-02M-01

Confirming a cycle and details of work, history information
Overview
2 1 3 2
When 80 % of the
maintenance cycle is
reached, a flashing
yellow-colored message
is displayed on the
[Maintenance menu]
A
screen. 5
After 3 After 4
6
Confirm the message

B
4
After maintenance
■To view
maintenance history 1 4
B 2
Choose an item that
warning is shown in
the Alarm field. 5
(Press the ‘OpTime’)
●Change to another
screen A A
3 Change to the limited-life
parts screen
Confirm task details
NPM-D3 2-1-1-2 EJM6DE-MB-02M-01

Maintenance
Over- Periodic inspection
2-1-2 view items by cycle 1
The lists below show check and grease locations/information organized by cycle.
Indications in the Power field mean as follows: “ON” = inspect with Power ON, “OFF” = inspect with Power
OFF, and “-” = inspect with Power ON or OFF.
Every-24-hours (daily) inspection items

■ Types in common
Check and Time
No. Unit Check and greasing location Power [min]
Ref.
greasing points
Main air pressure
(Pressure gauge)
Vacuum pump supply pressure
(Pressure gauge) Air pressure
ON check 3 4-1-1
Vacuum break pressure (Before operation)
1 Main body (Pressure gauge)
Cleaning blow pressure
(Pressure gauge)
3 4-2-1
Components-ejection box -
Cleaning
Feeder cart (End of operation) 1 4-2-2
2 Inside of the used-tape box -
(per cart)
Inspection time (min) = 6 + 1 x (the number of feeder carts)
■ Dispensing head (option)

Check and Time
Ref.
greasing points
Cleaning
1 Dispensing head Joint ON
(End of operation)
Cleaning
Holder inside ON
(End of operation)
Cleaning
Screw ON
(End of operation) 30 4-2-5
2 Screw unit Cleaning
Nozzle tip ON
(End of operation)
Cleaning and
Stopper pin ON check
(End of operation)
Dummy dispensing Check (Before
3 Dummy dispensing tape ON 1 4-1-2
unit operation)
Cleaning
4 Wiping station Cushion (wiping station) ON 3 4-2-4
(End of operation)
Inspection time (min) = 34 x (the number of heads)
NPM-D3 2-1-2-1 EJM6DE-MB-02M-01

■ Others (Option)
Check and Time
Ref.
greasing points
Overview
Cleaning
1 Tray feeder Refuse box - 1 4-2-3
(End of operation)
Tray feeder pallet Cleaning, check
2 Pallet - 2 4-3-1
(per pallet) (End of operation)
Inspection time (min) = 1 + 2 x (the number of pallets)
Every-140-hours (weekly) inspection items 1

■ Types in common
Check and Time
Ref.
greasing points
1 Touchscreen Touchscreen face OFF Cleaning 3 5-1
Multi-recognition
2 Cover glass OFF Cleaning 5 5-6
camera
Feeder cart
3 Feeder table - Cleaning 15 5-7
(per cart)
Inspection time (min) = 8 + 15 x (the number of feeder carts )
■ Light weight 16-nozzle head (option), 12-nozzle head (option),

8-nozzle head (option)
N Check and Time
Unit Check and greasing location Power [min]
Ref.
o. greasing points
Spring for nozzle cushion OFF Cleaning
Inner and outer circumferences OFF Cleaning
Spring for holding clamp claws OFF Cleaning
Clamp claw OFF Cleaning 40*1)
Filter OFF Cleaning
Nozzle holder
1 Taper surface OFF Cleaning 5-2
(per head)
Nozzle-holder shaft OFF Cleaning
Nozzle-holder shaft OFF Cleaning
OFF Cleaning
148*2)
Nozzle holder slicing surface Grease dispensing
OFF
(FL100)
*1) Time required for the light weight 16-nozzle head. The time required for the 12- and 8-nozzle
heads is 35 and 30 minutes, respectively.
*2) Time required for the light weight 16-nozzle head. The time required for the 12- and 8-nozzle
heads is 116 and 84 minutes, respectively.
The time required to inspect the light weight 16-nozzle head (min) = 188 x (the number of
heads)
NPM-D3 2-1-2-2 EJM6DE-MB-02M-01

Maintenance
Every-140-hours (weekly) inspection items 1

■ 2-nozzle head (option)
Check and Time
Ref.
greasing points
Filter OFF Cleaning
Nozzle holder taper surface OFF Cleaning
Nozzle holder Grease
1 30 5-3
(per head) dispensing
Clamp claw OFF
(BARRIERTA
IEL/V)
■ 2D inspection head (option)

Check and Time
Ref.
greasing points
2D-inspection
1 calibration jig Calibration plate surface OFF Cleaning 5 5-9
(option)
Inspection time (min) = 5 x (the number of calibration jigs )

Check and Time
Ref.
greasing points
Dummy dispensing Cleaning and
1 Dummy dispensing plate ON 2 5-10
unit inspection
Inspection time (min) = 2 x (the number of Dummy dispensing units)
■ Others (option)
Check and Time
Ref.
greasing points
Tray feeder drawer
1 Table surface OFF Cleaning 5 5-8
(per location)
PCB-support block (for
Support pin
2 automatic change), Support pin OFF Cleaning 10 5-4
automatic change
(for automatic change)
PCB support block PCB support block (for batch
3 OFF Cleaning 10 5-5
(for batch exchange) exchange)
When the support pin automatic change function is equipped

Inspection time (min) = 15
When the PCB support block (for batch exchange) is equipped

NPM-D3 2-1-2-3 EJM6DE-MB-02M-01

Every-560-hours (monthly) inspection items
Overview
■ Types in common
Check and Time
No. Unit Check and greasing location Power Ref.
greasing points [min]
Vacuum pump filter OFF Cleaning 10 6-8
1 Main body Emergency stop switch ON Check 2 6-9
Air drain (Regulator unit) OFF Check 10 6-17
Apply grease
2 XY unit X- and Y-axis linear guide ON 20 6-3
(LCG100)
Apply grease
Width-adjustment ball screw OFF
(LCG100)
Grease
Width-adjustment linear guide OFF dispensing
20 6-1
(LCG100)
3 PCB conveyor
Grease
Ball spline OFF dispensing
(LCG100)
PCB transfer belt OFF Check 5 6-6
PCB detection sensor OFF Cleaning 5 6-10
Safety switches ON Check 2 6-9
4 Cover
Safety cover OFF Cleaning 5 6-16
NPM-D3 2-1-2-4 EJM6DE-MB-02M-01

Maintenance
Every-560-hours (monthly) inspection items

■ Light weight 16-nozzle head (option), 12-nozzle head (option), 8-nozzle head
(option)
Check and Time
No. Unit Check and greasing location Power Ref.
greasing points [min]
Grease
Spring for holding clamp claws, dispensing
1 Nozzle holder 20*2) 6-4
Clamp claw (BARRIERTA
IEL/V)
Nozzle taper surface
Nozzle reflector
Nozzle Nozzle tip
2 OFF
(Option) Nozzle inside Cleaning 20*3) 6-5
Nozzle flange upper surface
(2D code area)
Nozzle changer
3 Nozzle reflector contact surface
(Option)
Vacuum air path 5 6-11
4 Placement head Check
θ-axis belt 10*4) 6-12
*2) Time required for replacing all nozzles set to the light weight 16-nozzle head. The 12- and 8-nozzle
heads require 15 and 10 minutes, respectively.
The time required to inspect the light weight 16-nozzle head (min) = 55 x (the number of
heads)

Check and Time
Ref.
greasing points
Nozzle reflector
Nozzle
Nozzle tip
1 (Option) OFF Cleaning 10
(per tow) Nozzle flange upper surface 6-5
(2D code area)
Nozzle changer
2 Nozzle reflector contact surface OFF Cleaning 5
(Option)
3 Placement head Reflector OFF Cleaning 15 6-7
NPM-D3 2-1-2-5 EJM6DE-MB-02M-01

Overview
Check and Time
Ref.
greasing points
Ball screw Apply grease
1 Dispensing head 30 6-19
Linear guide (LCG100)
Linear guide ON Grease
Dummy dispensing
2 dispensing 15 6-20
unit Rack & pinion (LCG100)
Inspection time (min) ＝45 x (the number of heads)
■ Others (option)
Check and Time
Ref.
greasing points
Apply grease
Width-adjustment ball screw OFF
(LCG100)
Grease
Width-adjustment linear shaft OFF dispensing
10 6-2
Conveyor L (LCG100)
1
Conveyor R Grease
Ball spline OFF dispensing
(LCG100)
PCB transfer belt OFF Check 2 6-6
PCB detection sensor OFF Cleaning 2 6-10
Components- Components detection sensor OFF
2 Cleaning 2 6-13
ejection conveyor Conveyor belt OFF
Ball screw OFF Apply grease
3 Tray feeder lifter
Linear guide OFF (LCG100)
Linear guide OFF Grease 20 6-14

4 Tray feeder drawer Cam plate (inside) OFF dispensing
(LCG100)
Cam block OFF
Tray feeder
5 magazine Slot OFF Cleaning 10 6-15
(per magazine)
Light-emitting and light-
6 Height sensor OFF Cleaning 10 6-18
receiving glasses
Support pin Support pin nozzle, support pin
7 OFF Cleaning 10 6-21
automatic change nozzle changer
Inspection time (min) = 14 x (the number of Conveyor L, Conveyor R)

+ 2 x (the number of Components-ejection conveyors)
+ 20 x (the number of tray feeders)
+ 10 x (the number of tray feeder magazines)
+ 5 x (the number of Height sensors)
+ 10 (with support pin automatic change function installed)
NPM-D3 2-1-2-6 EJM6DE-MB-02M-01

Maintenance
Every-3000-hours (every 6 months) inspection items

■ Types in common
Check and Time
Ref.
greasing points
1 Main controller Filter OFF Cleaning 10 7-1
2 Power unit 1 Filter OFF Cleaning 10 7-2

Check and Time
Ref.
greasing points
Inspection BOX
1 Filter (FA computer) OFF Cleaning 15 7-3
(option)
2D inspection head Correction of color
2 Camera ON 20 7-6
(option) and brightness

Check and Time
Ref.
greasing points
1 Dispensing head O-ring ON Replacement
20 7-4
O-ring ON Replacement
2 Screw unit
Collar ON Replacement 10 7-5
Every-6000-hours (yearly) inspection items

■ Types in common
Check and Time
Ref.
greasing points
Apply grease
1 XY unit Y-axis sliding plate ON 5 8-4
(LCG100)
Backlight Check 1 8-1
2 Touch screen ON Grease
Hinge (Front and rear sides) dispensing 1 8-2
(TOUCH LUBE)

■ 2-nozzle head (Option)
Check and Time
Ref.
greasing points
1 Nozzle (option) 1006 nozzle OFF Check 1 8-3
Inspection time (min) = 1 x (the number of nozzles)

NPM-D3 2-1-2-7 EJM6DE-MB-02M-01
Every-18000-hours (every 3 years) inspection items
Overview
■ Types in common
Check and Time
Ref.
greasing points
1 XY unit Cable bearer OFF Check 5 9-2

■ Light weight 16-nozzle head (Option), 12-nozzle head (Option), 8-nozzle head (Option)
Check and Time
Ref.
greasing points
Clamp claw
Nozzle holder
1 Spring for holding clamp claws OFF Check 15*5) 9-1
(per head)
Spring for nozzle cushion
*5) Time required for the light weight 16-nozzle head. The 12- and 8-nozzle heads require 15 and
10 minutes, respectively.
The time required to inspect the light weight 16-nozzle head (min)
= 15 x (the number of heads)
■ 2-nozzle head (Option)
Check and Time
Ref.
greasing points
Nozzle holder Clamp claw
1 OFF Check 10 9-1
(per head) Spring for holding clamp claws

Check and Time
Ref.
greasing points
Spring ON Replacement 15 9-3
1 Dispensing head Heater/
– Replacement – 9-4
Thermocouple
2 Screw unit Spring ON Replacement 10 9-3
Dummy dispensing
3 Spring ON Replacement 10 9-3
unit
Inspection time (min) ＝35 x (the number of heads)
NPM-D3 2-1-2-8 EJM6DE-MB-02M-01

Maintenance
2-1-3 view items by unit 1
The lists below show check and grease locations, information, and cycles organized by unit.
■ Types in common
Check and Cycle [h]
No. Unit name Check and greasing location grease Ref.
24 140 560 3000 6000 18000
points
Main air pressure ○
(Pressure gauge)
Vacuum pump supply ○
pressure (Pressure gauge) Air
pressure 4-1-1
Vacuum break pressure check ○
(Pressure gauge)
1 Main body unit Clean blow pressure
○
(Pressure gauge)
Components-ejection box ○ 4-2-1
Cleaning
Vacuum pump filter ○ 6-8
Emergency stop switch Check ○ 6-9
Air drain (Regulator) Check ○ 6-17
X-,Y- axis linear guide Apply ○ 6-3
2 XY unit Y-axis sliding plate grease ○ 8-4
Cable bearer Check ○ 9-2
Inside of the used-tape box ○ 4-2-2
3 Feeder cart Cleaning
Feeder table ○ 5-7
Apply
Width-adjustment ball screw ○
grease
Width-adjustment linear ○ 6-1
guide Grease
4 PCB conveyor dispensing
Ball spline ○
PCB transfer belt Check ○ 6-6

PCB detection sensor Cleaning ○ 6-10
Safety switch Check ○ 6-9
5 Cover
Safety cover Cleaning ○ 6-16
Color touchscreen face Cleaning ○ 5-1
Color Backlight Check ○ 8-1
6
touchscreen Grease
Hinge ○ 8-2
dispensing
Multi-
7 recognition Cover glass Cleaning ○ 5-6
camera
NPM-D3 2-1-3-1 EJM6DE-MB-02M-01

■ Types in common
Check and Cycle [h]
Check and greasing
Overview
No. Unit name location grease Ref.
24 140 560 3000 6000 18000
points
8 Main controller Filter Cleaning ○ 7-1
○
9 Power unit 1 Filter Cleaning 7-2
Height sensor Light-emitting and light-

10 Cleaning ○ 6-18
(option) receiving glasses
■ Light weight 16-nozzle head (option), 12-nozzle head (option), 8-nozzle head (option)
Check and Cycle [h]

No. Unit name Check and greasing location grease Ref.
24 140 560 3000 6000 18000
points
Placement Vacuum air path ○ 6-11
1 Check
head Θ-axis belt ○ 6-12
Spring for nozzle cushion Cleaning ○ 5-2
Spring for nozzle cushion Check ○ 9-1
Spring for holding clamp
Cleaning ○ 5-2
claws
Spring for holding clamp Grease
dispensing
○ 6-4
claws
Check ○ 9-1
claws
Clamp claw Cleaning ○ 5-2
Grease
Clamp claw dispensing
○ 6-4
2 Nozzle holder Clamp claw Check ○ 9-1
Inner and outer ○
circumferences
Filter ○
Cleaning
Taper surface ○
Nozzle holder shaft ○ 5-2
Nozzle holder shaft Cleaning ○
Cleaning ○
Nozzle holder slicing surface Grease
○
dispensing
Nozzle taper surface ○
Nozzle reflector ○
Nozzle Nozzle tip ○
3 Cleaning
(Option) Nozzle inside ○
6-5
Nozzle flange upper surface ○
(2D code area)
Nozzle
Nozzle reflector contact
4 changer Cleaning ○
surface
(Option)
NPM-D3 2-1-3-2 EJM6DE-MB-02M-01

Maintenance

Check and Cycle [h]
No. Unit name Check and greasing
location grease Ref.
24 140 560 3000 6000 18000
points
Filter ○
Nozzle holder taper Cleaning
○ 5-3
Placement surface
1
head Grease
Clamp claw dispensing
○
Reflector Cleaning ○ 6-7

Clamp claw ○
2 Nozzle holder Spring for holding clamp Check 9-1
○
claws
Nozzle reflector ○
Cleaning 6-5
Nozzle tip ○
3 Nozzle (Option) 1006 nozzle Check ○ 8-3
Nozzle flange
Cleaning ○
surface (2D code area)
6-5
Nozzle changer Nozzle reflector contact
4 Cleaning ○
(Option) surface

Check and Cycle [h]
No. Unit name Check and greasing
location grease Ref.
24 140 560 3000 6000 18000
points
2D inspection
1 calibration jig Calibration plate surface Cleaning ○ 5-9
(option)
Inspection BOX Filter
2 Cleaning ○ 7-3
(option) (FA computer)
2D inspection
3 head Camera Adjustment ○ 7-6
(option)
NPM-D3 2-1-3-3 EJM6DE-MB-02M-01

Check and Cycle [h]
Overview
greasing Check and
No. Unit name Ref.
location grease points 24 140 560 3000 6000 18000
Joint Cleaning ○ 4-2-5

Ball screw Apply grease ○ 6-19
Linear guide Apply grease ○ 6-19
1 Dispensing head O-ring Replacement ○ 7-4
Spring Replacement ○ 9-3
Heater/
Replacement ○ 9-4
Thermocouple
Holder inside Cleaning ○
Screw Cleaning ○
Nozzle tip Cleaning ○ 4-2-5
Cleaning･
2 Screw unit Stopper pin ○
Check
O-ring Replacement ○ 7-4
Collar Replacement ○ 7-5
Dummy
Check ○ 4-1-2
dispensing tape
Dummy Cleaning･
○ 5-10
dispensing plate Check
Dummy dispensing Grease
3 Rack & pinion ○ 6-20
unit dispensing
Grease
Linear guide ○ 6-20
dispensing
Cushion (wiping
4 Wiping station Cleaning ○ 4-2-4
station)
NPM-D3 2-1-3-4 EJM6DE-MB-02M-01

Maintenance
■ Others
Check and Cycle [h]
No. Unit name Check and
greasing location grease Ref.
24 140 560 3000 6000 18000
points
Width-adjustment Apply ○
ball screw grease
Width-adjustment ○ 6-2
linear shaft Grease
Conveyor L dispensing
1 Ball spline ○
Conveyor R
PCB transfer belt Check ○ 6-6
PCB detection
Cleaning ○ 6-10
sensor
Components-ejection Component ○
2 conveyor detection sensor Cleaning 6-13
(option) Conveyor belt ○
Ball screw ○
Tray feeder lifter Apply
3 6-14
(option) Linear guide grease ○
Table surface Cleaning ○ 5-8

Linear guide ○
Tray feeder drawer
4 Cam plate Grease
(option) ○ 6-14
(Inside) dispensing
Cam block ○
Tray feeder magazine

5 Slot Cleaning ○ 6-15
(Option)
6 Tray feeder (option) Refuse box Cleaning ○ 4-2-3
Tray feeder pallet Cleaning,
7 Pallet ○ 4-3-1
(option) Check
PCB-support block
(for automatic change),
Cleaning ○ 5-4
Support pin (for
Support pin automatic automatic change)
8
change (option) Support pin nozzle,
Nozzle changer for Cleaning ○ 6-21
support pin
PCB support block PCB support block
9 (for batch exchange) (for batch Cleaning ○ 5-5
(option) exchange)
NPM-D3 2-1-3-5 EJM6DE-MB-02M-01

Maintenance
Over- Periodic inspection items
2-1-4 view by applying grease
The lists below show grease locations and names organized by the target unit.
Grease dispensing
Overview
Cycle
No. Unit Location Grease Ref.
[h]
Nozzle holders Clamp claw BARRIERTA IEL/V 560 6-4

1 (Light weight16-, 12- and
Nozzle holder slicing
8-nozzles) FL100 140 5-2
surface
2 Placement head (2-nozzle) Clamp claw BARRIERTA IEL/V 140 5-3
Width-adjustment linear
3 PCB conveyor guide LCG100 560 6-1
Ball spline
Width-adjustment linear
Conveyor L shaft
4 LCG100 560 6-2
Conveyor R
Ball spline
Nozzle holders
5 (Light weight16-, 12- and BARRIERTA IEL/V 560 6-4
claw
8-nozzles)
Linear guide
Tray feeder drawer
6 Cam plate (inside) LCG100 560 6-14
(Option)
Cam block
7 Color touchscreen Hinge TOUCH LUBE 6000 8-2
Dummy dispensing unit Linear guide
8 LCG100 560 6-20
(option) Rack & pinion
Apply grease
Amount Cycle
No. Unit Location Grease [h] Ref.
[cm3]
Width-adjustment ball
1 PCB conveyor LCG100 3.6 560 6-1
screw
Conveyor L Width-adjustment ball
2 LCG100 1.8 560 6-2
Conveyor R screw
X-, Y- axis liner guide 9.4 560
3 XY unit LCG100 6-3
Y-axis sliding plate 1.0 6000
Ball screw 1.8 560
4 Tray feeder lifter (option) LCG100 6-14
Linear guide 7.2 560
Ball screw 0.6 560
5 Dispensing had (option) LCG100 6-19
Linear guide 0.6 560
NPM-D3 2-1-4 EJM6DE-MB-02M-01

Maintenance
Over- Consumable parts
2-1-5 view
Type in common
Life expectancy
No. Name Remarks Reference
[h]
PCB transfer belt
1
(PCB conveyor)
– – 11-1
PCB transfer belt
2
(Conveyor L, Conveyor R)
3 UPS battery (FA computer) (52560) 6 years
4 CPU board battery
60000 10 years
5 NCIO board battery 11-3
6 Jig station battery (8760) 1 year
7 Calendar battery (FA computer) (87600) 10 years
Option
■ Light weight 16-nozzle head
Life expectancy
[h]
1 Clamp claw
Spring for
2 18000 – 9-1
holding clamp claws
3 Spring for nozzle cushion
4 Air Filter element 6000 – 11-6
■ 12-nozzle head
Life expectancy
[h]
1 Clamp claw
Spring for
2 18000 – 9-1
holding clamp claws
■ 8-nozzle head
Life expectancy
[h]
1 Clamp claw
Spring for
2 18000 – 9-1
holding clamp claws
NPM-D3 2-1-5-1 EJM6DE-MB-02M-01

■ 2-nozzle head
Overview
Life expectancy
[h]
1 Clamp claw
Spring for 18000 9-1
2 –
holding clamp claws
3 Air Filter element 6000 11-9
■ Dispensing head
Life expectancy
[h]
1 O-ring (Dispensing head) 3000 7-4
2 Spring (Dispensing head) 18000 9-3
Heater/Thermocouple (Dispensing
3 18000 9-4
head)
4 O-ring (Screw unit) 3000 7-4
5 Collar (Screw unit) 3000 – 7-5
6 Spring (Screw unit) 18000 9-3
7 Spring (Dummy dispensing unit) 18000 9-3
Dummy dispensing tape (Dummy
8 – 11-4
dispensing unit)
9 Cushion (wiping station) – 11-5
■Inspection head
Life expectancy
[h]
1 FA computer: Calendar battery (87600) 10 years
11-3
2 FA computer: UPS battery (26280) 3 years
NPM-D3 2-1-5-2 EJM6DE-MB-02M-01

Periodic inspection points
Maintenance
Over-
2-1-6 view by unit 1 <Type in common>
Pressure gauges
Front side 1 2
①Vacuum pump supply pressure
②Vacuum break pressure
③Clean blow pressure
④For option
4 3
Rear side
Main air pressure
Components-ejection box
Front and rear sides
NPM-D3 2-1-6-1 EJM6DE-MB-02M-01

Vacuum pump
Overview
Rear side
Vacuum pump
XY unit
X-axis linear guide
Cable bearer
Cable bearer
Y-axis sliding plate
Y-axis linear guide
Y-axis sliding plate
Color touchscreen
Front and rear sides Touchscreen
NPM-D3 2-1-6-2 EJM6DE-MB-02M-01

Maintenance
Over-
2-1-6 view by unit 2 <Type in common>
PCB conveyor
PCB support block PCB detection sensor
PCB transfer belt PCB transfer belt
Ball spline Ball spline
Width-adjustment Width-adjustment
ball screw ball screw
Linear guide Linear guide
There are six PCB detection sensors on each of the light-

emitting and the light-receiving side in both lanes 1 and 2.
NPM-D3 2-1-6-3 EJM6DE-MB-02M-01

Conveyor L , Conveyor R
Overview
■Conveyor L (N-CONL), Conveyor R (N-CONR)
PCB transfer belt

PCB detection
sensor
Ball spline
Width-adjustment
ball screw
PCB transfer belt
Width-adjustment
linear shaft
Ball spline
NPM-D3 2-1-6-4 EJM6DE-MB-02M-01

Maintenance
Over-
2-1-6 view by unit 3 <Nozzle head> (Option)
Feeder cart
Feeder table
Used-tape box
Multi-recognition camera
Cover glass
NPM-D3 2-1-6-5 EJM6DE-MB-02M-01

main controller ・ power unit 1
Overview
Front side
filter
Height sensor (option)

Light-emitting and light-receiving glasses
NPM-D3 2-1-6-6 EJM6DE-MB-02M-01

Maintenance
Over-
2-1-6 view by unit 4 <Placement head> (Option)
■Nozzle changer
■Placement head
NPM-D3 2-1-6-7 EJM6DE-MB-02M-01

Light weight 16-nozzle head
Overview
■Light weight 16-nozzle head ■Nozzle
Nozzle flange upper

Nozzle inside
Nozzle reflector
Nozzle tip
■Nozzle holder
Spring for nozzle
cushion
surface
Inner and outer
circumferences
Spring for holding
clamp claws
Clamp claw
■Nozzle changer
Nozzle reflector
θ-axis belt Vacuum air path contact surface
Splicing shaft
sliding surface
* This is shared with the 12-nozzle head.
NPM-D3 2-1-6-8 EJM6DE-MB-02M-01

Maintenance
Over-
12-nozzle head
■12-nozzle head ■Nozzle

Nozzle flange upper
surface (2D code
area)
Nozzle inside
Nozzle reflector
Nozzle tip
■Nozzle holder
Spring for nozzle
cushion

surface
Inner and outer
circumferences
Spring for holding
Clamp claws
Clamp claw
■Nozzle changer
Nozzle reflector
contact surface
Vacuum air path
Splicing shaft
θ-axis belt sliding surface
* This is shared with the Light weight 16-

nozzle head.
NPM-D3 2-1-6-9 EJM6DE-MB-02M-01

8-nozzle head
Overview
Nozzle inside
Nozzle flange upper
Nozzle reflector
Nozzle tip
■Nozzle holder
Spring for nozzle

cushion

surface
Inner and outer
circumferences
Spring for holding
Clamp claws
Clamp claw
■Nozzle changer
Nozzle reflector
contact surface
Vacuum air path
θ-axis belt Splicing shaft

sliding surface
NPM-D3 2-1-6-10 EJM6DE-MB-02M-01

Maintenance
Over-
2-nozzle head
Nozzle flange
upper surface
(2D code area)
Nozzle reflector
Nozzle tip
■Nozzle holder

claws
Clamp claw
Taper surface
■Nozzle changer
Nozzle reflector
Vacuum air path contact surface
θ-axis belt
NPM-D3 2-1-6-11 EJM6DE-MB-02M-01

Maintenance
Over-
2-1-6 view by unit 7 <2D-inspection head> (Option)
2D-inspection calibration jig
Overview
Calibration plate surface
Inspection BOX
filter
NPM-D3 2-1-6-12 EJM6DE-MB-02M-01

Maintenance
Over-
2-1-6 view by unit 8 <Dispensing head> (Option)
Dispensing head
Ball screw
Joint
O-ring
Linear guide
O-ring
Spring
Heater/Thermocouple
Screw unit
This is a sectional view for explanation.
O-ring
Screw
Spring
Collar
Holder inside
O-ring
Stopper pin
Nozzle tip
NPM-D3 2-1-6-13 EJM6DE-MB-02M-01

Dummy dispensing unit
Overview
Dummy dispensing plate
Dummy dispensing tape
Spring
Linear guide Rack & pinion
Wiping station
Cushion (wiping station)
NPM-D3 2-1-6-14 EJM6DE-MB-02M-01

Maintenance
Over-
2-1-6 view by unit 9 <Others > (option)
Components-ejection conveyor
Component
detection sensor
Conveyor belt
NPM-D3 2-1-6-15 EJM6DE-MB-02M-01

Tray feeder main unit
Overview
Refuse box
Tray feeder lifter
Linear guide
Ball screw
NPM-D3 2-1-6-16 EJM6DE-MB-02M-01

Maintenance
Over-
2-1-6 view by unit 10 <Others> (option)
Tray feeder drawer
Linear guide
Table surface
Cam plate (inside)
Linear guide
Cam block
Tray feeder pallet
Pallet
Tray feeder magazine
Slot
NPM-D3 2-1-6-17 EJM6DE-MB-02M-01

Support pin automatic change
Overview
■Dual conveyor PCB support block
(for automatic change)
■Nozzle changer for support ■Support pin (for automatic change)

pins
■Nozzle for support pins
1100-nozzle 100-nozzle
(for 2-nozzle head) (for Light weight 16-,12-, 8-nozzle head)
Nozzle flange upper

Nozzle reflector
Nozzle inside
Nozzle tip
(vacuum pad)
NPM-D3 2-1-6-18 EJM6DE-MB-02M-01

Maintenance
Over- Part exchange due to
2-1-7 view limited-life
To use the machine longer

Parts or units used in the machine have limited life-spans. To use the machine over a long period of time,
replace the affected parts or units before the end of their life. Please contact us for replacement.
■About part aging degradation trouble

Some parts installed in our machine suffer from aging degradation during long term use.
We call such parts limited-life parts.
Some of the limited-life parts, if used past their estimated useful life, could lead to failure
that involves smoke, offensive odors or risks at work.
For your continued safety, please replace those parts during a recommended
replacement period.
■Part failure occurrence

Depending on the occurrence time, a
part failure has three general
periods (stages) - early failure, chance
failure, and wear-out failure.
・Early failure:
Failure that occurs due to a
manufacturing
or other defect during initial operations.
・Chance failure:
Sudden and unpredictable failure that
occurs during the useful life of a
part.
・Wear-out failure:
Failure that occurs as a result of aging
degradation. The number of such failures
sharply increases near the end of the Figure 1. Age of service and failure rate
useful life of parts.
■Replacement of part
For limited-life part items and a guide for the recommended replacement period, refer to the list in
this chapter.
* Part life is influenced by the usage status or environment.

The recommended replacement period stated in the list is used only as a guide. It is not meant to
guarantee the length of the part’s life.
●In NPM-D3, parts and units corresponding to “Replacement of service life-limited component (7 years)”
and “Replacement of service lift-limited component (15 years)” are not installed.
NPM-D3 2-1-7-1 EJM6DE-MB-02M-01

See the Parts list and the Wiring diagram for details of parts.
Parts or units required to replace within 5 years
Overview
Number Part name Quantity Kit number/Name
N610160758AA／
N510046058AA GAS-SPRING 4
Whole cover : NPM-D3
XY-axis wiring at F side: N610161773AA／
N610157818AA 1
NPM-D3 XY unit : NPM-D3
XY-axis wiring at R side: N610161773AA／
N610157825AA 1
NPM-D3 XY unit : NPM-D3
Parts or units required to replace within 10 years

Number Part name Quantity Kit number/Name
N610067516AB／
N510037010AA POWER-SUPPLY 1
CPU BOX
N610157832AA／
MCDHT3520NL3 MOTOR-DRIVER 2
Main unit control : NPM-D3
N610157832AA／
MEDHT7364NL3 MOTOR-DRIVER 2
Main unit control : NPM-D3
N610067177AD/
N510044504AA MOTOR-DRIVER 2
Tray feeder box: NPM
N610161320AA／
KXFP6GE3A00 POWER-SUPPLY 1
POWER UNIT1: NPM-D3
N610067177AD/
N610161320AA／
POWER UNIT1: NPM-D3
N610067177AD/
TEMPERATURE N610083275AA/
N510055083AA 1
CONTROLLER Dispensing head control：NPM
NPM-D3 2-1-7-2 EJM6DE-MB-02M-01

NPM-D3 2-1-7-3 EJM6DE-MB-02M-01
3 Tasks related to
maintenance
Maintenance
Greasing 1
3-1
Components of grease gun
The grease gun kit consists of the following 3 pieces.

●Make sure that the nozzle is securely fixed.
●Select a tube nozzle, nozzle that matches the greasing point.
Cap
Nozzle
Grease canister
Grease gun Tube nozzle Cartridge (200g)
How to adjust the grease gun

Adjust the nozzle tip if the clamping force is too strong.
Hexagonal
section
Tighten
1 Hold hexagonal part with a
spanner wrench
Loosen
2 Turn the tip with pliers
Tip section

How to install cartridge
Remove the cap from cartridge

Cartridge 1 and screw the cartridge into
the main body with the grease
inspection
canister removed
Periodic
●Screw in tight.
(Loose cartridges may cause grease to
leak)
Pull the chain on the grease

Canister
Chain
2 canister ( 1 ) and lock it into
1
the groove ( 2 )
Groove
Insert the cartridge into the

1
2
3 grease canister ( 1 ), and screw
the canister into the main body
( 2 )
Release the chain from the groove

4 ( 1 ) and house it in the canister
( 2 )
2 ●Check if the grease comes out of the nozzle
tip by pumping the lever a few times ( 3 )
Lever 3

Maintenance
Greasing 2
3-1
How to use the grease gun
Push the nozzle tip onto the

1 grease nipple
2
1 Pump the lever a few times
2 ●To apply the prescribed amount of grease,
operate the lever in the following positions -
fully open, halfway opened, a quarter way
opened, or fully closed.
●Delivery rate, if the grease gun as an
option is in use, is 0.9 cm3 per stroke.
* This picture shows how to use the grease gun.

The machine on the photo is not NPM-D3.
Wipe off any excess grease
3 with a cloth
●If left unattended, the excess grease
may drop on the PCB during
production.
Applied grease list

Grease Specified
Main grease point type grease name Manufacturer
XY table Grease LCG100 Panasonic Factory Solutions, Co, Ltd.

(ball screw, linear bearing)
Fluorine
BARRIERTA
Placement head grease for NOK Kluber Co., Ltd.
IEL/V
vacuum
●For information about the grease precautions, see (→P.15-2 ) [Safety Data Sheet (SDS)].

Anti-rust and lubricant list
Main grease point Type Designated Manufacturer

lubricant name
Color touchscreen (hinge) Anti-rust Touch lube Panasonic Factory Solutions Co., Ltd
and
inspection
Periodic
Nozzle holder (slicing surface) lubricant FL100 SUMICO LUBRICANT CO., LTD.
●Precautions on ant-rust and lubricant, see [Safety data sheet(SDS)] (→P15-2) .

Maintenance
How to handle the
3-2 feeder cart (feeder cart: option)
Detaching procedure
Press for over Fix the handle

1 three seconds 2
1 Lift the handle up
(The lamp changes from
illumination to flashing with the
buzzer sound that allows you
to detach the cart from the
machine.)
*Please note that the feeder

cart can move 100mm
forward.
2 Lower the pipe until it

stops
Pull the feeder

3 cart out
●One on either side
*Be careful not to pinch the

feeder power cable in any
place as you lift the handle
up.
.
WARNING
Pay full attention to your surroundings and keep a safe distance
from people around you while moving the feeder cart
(Collisions with the feeder cart may result in injury.)

How to attach
inspection
Periodic
Press for over
1 Attach the feeder cart
2 three seconds
(The lamp changing from
illumination to flashing
allows you to attach the cart
to the main body)
*Be careful not to pinch the

feeder power cable in any (The cart is secured to the
place as you set the cart. machine as the buzzer
sounds, and the lamp
changes from flashing to
illumination)
3 Put the handle back
1 Pull the pipe up 2 Put the handle back
●One location
*Be careful not to pinch the feeder power cable in any
place as you put the handle back.

Maintenance
Detaching and attaching
3-3 the feeder table cover
Detaching the feeder table cover
1 Pull out the

feeder cart
2 3
(→P.3-2) SERVO
OFF
4 Slide and detach

the feeder-table
cover toward you

Attaching the feeder table cover
1 2
inspection
Periodic
SERVO
OFF
Align the feeder-table cover end face with

4 Attach the
feeder table
3 the attachment area end face
cover
Align
Attachment area
Attach the
5 6 7 feeder cart
(→P.3-2)
SERVO
ON

4 Periodic inspection
Every-24-hours
Maintenance Before Inspecting the pressure
4-1-1 opera-
tion gauge 1
Describes inspection of the supply pressure.
Check the air pressure

Tool used: None Time required: 3 minutes (Machine power ON)
Front side ①Vacuum pump

1 2
supply pressure
(-100 to -87 kPa)
②Vacuum break
pressure (8 to12 kPa)
③Cleaning blow pressure

(0.13 to 0.14 Mpa)
④For option
(0.4 Mpa)
4 3
Rear side
Main air pressure

(0.500 to 0.555 MPa)
NPM-D3 4-1-1-1 EJM6DE-MB-04M-01

Checking the vacuum pump supply pressure
1 2
inspection
Periodic
Periodic
1
Every
24
2 +
hours
(The indicator color changes from gray

to light blue, and the vacuum pump is
activated)
Check the vacuum pump supply

3 pressure (the pressure gauge)
●Pressure range: -100 to -87kPa
NPM-D3 4-1-1-2 EJM6DE-MB-04M-01

4-1-1 opera-
tion gauge 2
Check the air pressure (Main air pressure)

Tool used: Allen wrench (3 mm) Time required: 3 minutes
●Adjust when the main air pressure is out of the required value range.
Remove the bolts and remove

1 the rear pressure gauge cover Rear
pressure
Rear side gauge cover
●Remove bolts
●Bolt: Four
locations
Adjust the pressure to be

2 within the range Main air
● How to operate the regulator knob regulator knob
1: Pull the knob up
2: Adjust it
3: Pull it down
3 Attach the rear pressure

gauge cover
●Bolt: Four locations
NPM-D3 4-1-1-3 EJM6DE-MB-04M-01

inspection
Periodic
Periodic
Every
24
hours
NPM-D3 4-1-1-4 EJM6DE-MB-04M-01

4-1-1 opera-
tion gauge 3
Adjusting the air pressure

(pressure of cleaning blow, optional air pressure and vacuum break )
Tool used: Phillips screwdriver (No.2), spanner (10 mm) Time required: 5 minutes
●Adjust when the cleaning blow pressure, optional air pressure and vacuum break pressure is out of
required value range.
1 Remove the
feeder cart
2 3
(→P.3-2) SERVO
OFF
Attach the cover front

6 side of the cart
Front side
●Tighten screws
●Screw: Four locations
7 8 9 Attach the feeder

cart (→P.3-2)
SERVO
ON
NPM-D3 4-1-1-5 EJM6DE-MB-04M-01

Remove the cover
4
inspection
front side of the cart
Periodic
Periodic
Front side
Every
24
hours
●Tighten screws
●Screw: Four locations
Adjust the pressure to be

5 within the range
(b) Cleaning blow regulator knob
(c) Optional air pressure (a) Vacuum break pressure

regulator knob regulator knob
● How to use the regulator knob

1: Pull the knob up
2: Adjust it
3: Pull it down
(a) Vacuum break pressure (8 to12 kPa)

c b (b) Cleaning blow pressure (0.13 to 0.14 Mpa)
(c) For option (0.4 Mpa)
NPM-D3 4-1-1-6 EJM6DE-MB-04M-01

Maintenance Before Checking the dummy
4-1-2 opera-
tion
dispensing tape
Describes inspection of the dummy dispensing tape.

Tool used: None Time required: One minutes (per location)
●For the rear side,
1 2 3
SERVO
OFF
●The head moves to the

exchange position.
NPM-D3 4-1-2-1 EJM6DE-MB-04M-01

inspection
Periodic
Periodic
4 Visually check the remaining amount of tape 5
●At this time, also check Every
Dummy dispensing tape
for slack in the tape. 24
If tape slack is found, hours
turn the feed side reel in
a counterclockwise to
take up the slack.
Feed side Tape-up side
6
SERVO
ON
NPM-D3 4-1-2-2 EJM6DE-MB-04M-01

Maintenance After Cleaning the
4-2-1 opera-
tion components-ejection box
Describes cleaning of the components-ejection box.

Tool used: None Time required: 3 minutes (Total of the front and rear sides)
●Clean the components-ejection box.
●Clean it after operation.
●Not only after operation but also during production, clean it before it is full.
1 2 3 Push the X-axis

inward
SERVO
OFF
Remove components in the components-

5 Put it back in its 4 ejection box
original position
Lift it up from the bottom of the
Place the box by adjusting components-ejection box to remove.
the groove.
Bolt
6 7
SERVO
ON
●Ensure that it is properly
placed.
(Otherwise, the error
message appears on the
screen and you cannot
activate the machine.)

Maintenance After Cleaning the used-tape
4-2-2 opera-
tion box (feeder cart: option)
Describes cleaning of the used-tape box.

Tool used: None Time required: 1 minutes (per location)
●Clean the used-tapes box of the feeder cart and 13-slot feeder (option).
●Not only after operation but also during production, clean them before they are full.
Draw out the used-tape box Dispose of the

1 2 used tapes
inspection
Periodic
Periodic
Every
24
hours
Used-tape box
●If you shake the box back and forth several times, the tape
layer becomes flat so that you can easily draw it out.
Put the used-tape

3 box back in its
original position

Maintenance After Cleaning the refuse box
4-2-3 opera-
tion (tray feeder: option)
Describes cleaning of the refuse box.

Tool used: None Time required: 1 minute
●Clean the refuse boxes of the single tray feeder (option) and the twin tray feeder (option).
●Not only after operation but also during production, clean them before they are full.
1 Draw out the refuse box 2 Empty it out
Refuse box
●If you shake the box back and forth for several times, the
tape layer becomes flat and it may easy to draw out.
3 Put the refuse

box back in its
original position

Maintenance After Cleaning the wiping
4-2-4 opera-
tion station (dispensing head: option)
Describes cleaning of the wiping station.

Tool used: Lint free cloth Time required: 3 minutes (per location)
inspection
Periodic
Periodic
inward
SERVO
OFF
Every
24
hours
Return the wiping Remove the wiping station and wipe off
5 station back in 4 adhesive residue
the original
●Wipe the cushion (wiping
position station) or other areas
●Make sure that it is adhering adhesive residue
properly placed on the with a lint free cloth.
stand. If it is placed with
it stranded on the edge of
the stand, nozzles may Wiping station
be damaged in operation.
6 7
SERVO
ON

Maintenance After Cleaning and checking the
4-2-5 opera-
tion
screw unit and the nozzles 1
Describes cleaning and inspection of the syringe placed in the dispending head.
Tool used: Lint free cloth, air blow gun Time required: 30 minutes (per location)
Detaching the syringe

If the dispensing head is attached to the front side, perform from the rear side, if the one attached to the rear
side, perform from the other way. The explanation in the following procedure is an example when the
dispensing head is installed on the rear side and operated from the front side.
1 2 3
SERVO
OFF

To 4
exchange position.
Warning
Individuals with pacemakers, etc. should keep away from the linear motor
(Risk of accidents caused by errors in operation due to magnetic force)
NPM-D3 4-2-5-1 EJM6DE-MB-04M-01

4 Cover the multi-recognition camera and the
5 Disconnect the
inspection
nozzle changer with the cloth in order to air plug
Periodic
Periodic
protect from adhesives
Every
24
hours
6 Detach the syringe

①While securing SC-axis and θ-
axis with one hand, rotate the lock
plate with the other hand in a
2 clockwise direction seen from the
top to unlock the syringe.
②Pull the syringe straight out.
●Be careful not to turn the gear of SC-axis in a Lock plate

clockwise direction seen from the top during syringe
replacement, otherwise, adhesive may leak.
SC-axis
Θ-axis
To 7
NPM-D3 4-2-5-2 EJM6DE-MB-04M-01

4-2-5 opera-
tion
Cleaning the joint

Clean adhesive on the air joint part.
If adhesive remains , air leaks, causing poor dispensing.
Disconnect the Check that there is no adhesive on the joint

7 joint from the 8
syringe
●Wipe off excess around O-ring
1 with a lint free cloth damped with
solvent (alcohol) if it sticks.
NOTICE
2
●Please replace the O-ring if it is
①Turn the joint. cracked or deteriorated.
②Pull it out.
Attach the joint

9 to the syringe
1
To 10
2
①Push the joint in.

②Turn it .
NPM-D3 4-2-5-3 EJM6DE-MB-04M-01

Cleaning the screw unit 1
10 Disconnect the
11 Disassemble the screw unit
inspection
screw unit from
Periodic
Periodic
the syringe
(counterclockwise)
Top cap Screw
Every
24
●Turn the top cap in a clockwise hours
and turn the bottom cap in a
counterclockwise to remove.
●Do not remove the screws.
Bottom cap
Wipe the adhesive in the screw shaft using an Wipe adhesive

13 air blow gun 12 on each part off
using a lint free
cloth
●Cover the part when using
an air blow gun because
adhesive will scatter in all
directions.
14 Clean the parts for three minutes with an

ultrasonic cleaner
●Having the water level of the ultrasonic
cleaner tank at 1 cm, place a beaker
containing cleaning solvent (e.g. alcohol,
etc.) into the ultrasonic cleaner.
● Put the parts inside the beaker. (The
amount of cleaning solvent inside the
beaker should be sufficient to let all parts
sink under the solvent.) To 15
● The cleaning time should not exceed 5
minutes.
1 cm (Even cleaning for 5 minutes or more brings
about the same effect.)
NPM-D3 4-2-5-4 EJM6DE-MB-04M-01

4-2-5 opera-
tion
Cleaning the screw unit 2
15 Take the parts out and clean each part with a

swab
●If the nozzle inside is clogged with adhesive, remove it with a
pin, drill, or wire that matches the nozzle hole diameter.
●Check for any adhesive on and around the O-ring.
●Using the swab of P751S sometimes sticks into the screw
shaft. Use the stick side of the swab to clean inside of the
screw shaft.
NOTICE
●Please replace the O-ring if it is cracked or deteriorated.
●Use the following industrial swabs for precision machine for cleaning.
Model Purchased from Remarks
751S J.C.B. Industry Limited

We do not sell them (it).
TEL : 03 (3575) 1884
■Example of cleaning
Dispensing nozzle
Nozzle holder
When adhesive residue found on a

Screw shaft swab to wipe the part is reduced to a
relatively small amount as shown above,
any remaining adhesive will not affect
the dispensing accuracy.
NPM-D3 4-2-5-5 EJM6DE-MB-04M-01

16 Blow away
17 Assemble the screw unit back and check the
inspection
alcohol with an condition of cleaned parts
Periodic
Periodic
air blow gun to
dry them
①No clogging in the tip
Every
②No adhesive stuck on the tip 24
③No adhesive stuck on the hours
outer surface
3
④No adhesive stuck on the
4 reference plane
⑤No bends in the nozzle and
the stopper
●Remaining alcohol will

harden the adhesive.
They should be dried
completely.
5 1 2
18 Set the screw unit to the syringe

(Clockwise)
To 19
NPM-D3 4-2-5-6 EJM6DE-MB-04M-01

4-2-5 opera-
tion
Attaching the syringe
19 Set the screw unit to the syringe holder
①Adjust the guide pin of the screw unit to the 9 to 11 o’clock

position. Then insert it into housing.
1
Guide pin
Flange
②Rotate the screw in the clockwise direction until it stops

rotating.
Housing groove
●By moving it to the 9 to 11 o’clock position in the clockwise

direction, the guide pin is fitted into the groove of the
housing.
③Push the syringe in until it hits, with the angle of the flange
adjusted according to the holder direction.
NPM-D3 4-2-5-7 EJM6DE-MB-04M-01

20 Rotate the lock plate in the counterclockwise direction, and
inspection
lock the syringe
Periodic
Periodic
● Check that the lock plate comes to the lock position.
Every
24
hours
Lock plate
Take out the

23 22 cloth covered 21 Connect the air
with the multi- plug
recognition
camera and the
nozzle changer
24
SERVO
ON
NPM-D3 4-2-5-8 EJM6DE-MB-04M-01

Maintenance
As Cleaning and inspecting
4-3-1 needed the pallet (tray feeder pallet: option)
Describes cleaning and inspecting the pallet.

Tool used: Lint free cloth Time required: 2 minutes (per location)
1 Clean the (whole)

upper surface of
2 Visually check
the drawer
3 Visually check
the pallet for
the pallet block warps
●If you find any cracks or ●If it is warped, fix it.
chips, avoid using the
pallet.
Drawer block
Pallet upper
surface

Every-140-hours
Maintenance
Cleaning the
5-1 touchscreen
Describes the cleaning of the touchscreen.

Tool used: Lint free cloth Time required: 3 minutes (Total time required for cleaning front/rear touchscreens)
●Dust can cause touchscreen malfunction. The screen should be cleaned as needed.
Turn OFF the Wipe with a Unlock the

1 power and lock 2 clean, soft cloth 3 machine and
the machine ON
OFF
NOTICE
●Be careful not to give any shock to or damage the touch screen.
●When the touch screen is laden with dust or dirt, soak a lint-free cloth in a neutral detergent diluted
with water and wring out thoroughly. Use the cloth to wipe off the dust or dirt. Never spray cleaning
solutions, including liquid crystal display cleaners, directly on the touch screen; the liquid could
penetrate inside of the touch screen and cause it to malfunction.
●Use a lint-free cloth when cleaning the touch screen in a clean room.
NPM-D3 5-1 EJM6DE-MB-05M-01

Cleaning the nozzle holder 1
Maintenance
5-2 (Light weight16-/12-/8-nozzle head: option)
Describes the cleaning of the nozzle holder placed in the transfer head.
Tool used: Lint free cloth, air blow gun, baby cotton swabs, cleaning paper, nozzle holder shaft cleaning
tool (N610130890AB)
Time required: 40 minutes per light weight16-nozzle head, 35 minutes per 12-nozzle head, 30 minutes per
8-nozzle head
●The following description takes the 12-nozzle head option as an example; however, the same
Procedure is also applicable to the light weight16- and 8-nozzle heads.
inspection
Cleaning parts
Periodic
Periodic
Spring for nozzle cushion
(If dust settles, it could cause faulty nozzle cushion) Every
140
hours
Inner and outer circumferences of

nozzle holder (If dust settles, it
could cause pickup errors due to
sliding failures)
Spring for holding nozzle clamp

claws
●It holds the clamp claws. (If dust
settles, it could cause nozzle
clamp errors)
Clamp claw (one on either side)

●It directly catches hold of a
nozzle. (If dust settles, it could
cause a pickup or placement
error due to air leak or a
catching failure)
Nozzle holder shaft
●It is an insertion section of a
nozzle holder. If dust is adhered
on it, it may cause a pickup error
due to sliding defect.
Nozzle holder contact surface
(If dust settles, it could cause a pickup error or affect
placement accuracy due to air leaks caused by the
nozzle holder contact surface that cannot keep in
absolute contact with the nozzle contact surface as a
nozzle is securely fixed in place)
Vacuum filter
●The filter, located in the air pathway, prevents air dust from
Nozzle holder shaft sliding section
penetrating inside of the machine.
●It is an insertion section of a
(If dust accumulates, it could cause a pickup error because of
nozzle holder shaft. If dust is
delayed timing to switch vacuum at the nozzle tip)
adhered on it, it may cause a
pickup error due to sliding defect.

Maintenance
Detaching the nozzle holders

Remove the
1 2 feeder table
cover
(→P.3-3)
●Work at the front side for
front feeder specification
●Y-axis of the front head and rear tray specification.
moves to the front side. ●Work at the rear side for
●For feeder specification, Y- rear feeder specification.
axis of the rear head ●Detach the feeder cart.
moves to the rear side, and
for tray specification, it
moves to the front side.

3 Detach the nozzle holder
inspection
Periodic
Periodic
●Move the head to the position where your
workability enhances.
■With nozzles attached Every

140
●Turn the nozzle clockwise as viewed from below while hours
pushing up it.
●Be careful not to let the nozzle cushion use spring pop out.
●The spring for holding clamp claws can be easily
deformed so you should avoid pressing it tightly with your
fingers.
●Follow the same procedure to detach all nozzle holders
from the transfer head.
■Without nozzles attached Cleaning tool Positioning pin

●Use the nozzle holder shaft cleaning tool (option).
●Align the groove on the 12-nozzle cleaning side with the
positioning pins of the nozzle holder.
●Turn the nozzle clockwise as viewed from below while
pushing up the cleaning tool.
To 5
Groove
4 Pull the nozzle out
NOTICE
●Pull it straight out. If pulled out at To 5
an angle, the clamp claws could
be damaged.
Nozzle Nozzle holder

Maintenance
Cleaning the nozzle holder
Clean the taper

5 Clean the nozzle holder 6 face and the
clamp claw tip
Tip of nozzle holder
Alcohol-dampened baby (filter)
Nozzle holder cotton swab
Alcohol-dampened baby
cotton swab
●Wipe it clean a few times
and then leave it to dry. B
Spring for holding
clamp claws
NOTICE
●Do not wipe the nozzle holder tip (filter) and the spring for
holding clamp claws, with a cotton swab.
●Clean only the parts A and B (the hole area of the nozzle
holder). Otherwise, the filter may get clogged with dust, or
wiping off grease can cause the spring to get rusted.
NOTICE
Use the following industrial swabs for precision machine for cleaning.
Model Purchased from Remarks
BB-001:for 12-nozzle head and 8-nozzle head We also sell the cotton swabs.
BB-002:for light weight 16-nozzle head式 BB-001 Product No.:
Sanyo Co., Ltd. N510058057AA
TEL : 0721 (24) (5,000 pieces)
3376 BB-002 Product No.:
N510058058AA
(6,250 pieces)
P753S:for 12-nozzle head and 8-nozzle head J.C.B. Industry

P752S:for light weight 16-nozzle head Limited
We do not sell them (it).
TEL : 03 (3575)
1884

Keep an air blow gun 1.5cm away from the
7
inspection
nozzle holder and blow air for about 10
Periodic
Periodic
seconds (Air pressure at 0.5 MPa)
Every
140
hours
1.5cm
●Blow air in the

■If dust still settles direction of the arrow.
Replace the filter
Filter No.: N610097899AA
(Common to 16-/12-/8-nozzle heads)
Wipe the outer
2 1 8 part
Nozzle
(fit surface and clamp claw
tip)
Flat head
screwdriver Nozzle holder tip (filter)
NOTICE
●Remove the filter at the nozzle holder tip with a flat head
screwdriver.
●Be careful not to forget to tighten the screw when installing the
filter. Dried lint free cloth
Clean the spring for the nozzle cushion use

9 (for 12-/8-nozzle) ●Replace the spring if deformed. Otherwise, It may cause a sliding
problem with the nozzle holder, thereby leading to a pickup or
placement error. Moreover, it may cause the nozzle holder to be
unable to be dismounted from the head so that you need to
disassemble the head to dismount it.
●Push the spring in to the nozzle holder as deep as possible. Also,
be careful not to lose it during maintenance work.
To 10
NOTICE
●For the light weight 16-nozzle head, the spring is built
Spring for nozzle into the nozzle holder. So, blow off dust and others with
Dried lint free cloth an air blow gun.
cushion

Maintenance
5-2 (Light weight 16-/12-/8-nozzle head: option)
Cleaning the nozzle holder shaft
10 Prepare for cleaning 11 Attach the

cleaning paper to
■Nozzle-holder shaft ■Cleaning paper the cleaning tool
cleaning tool ( Approx. 40 x 50 mm) Cleaning paper
φ5: for 8-nozzle head and 12-nozzle head
φ5: for 8 nozzle head and

φ4: for 16 nozzle head 12-nozzle head
19 Attach the
nozzle (If any)
18 Attach the 17 Detach the
nozzle holder
spring
Nozzle
Nozzle
holders
20 Attach the nozzle holder

■With the nozzles attached
●Turn the nozzle clockwise as viewed from below while pushing
it up.
●Be careful not to let the nozzle cushion use spring pop out.
●The spring for holding clamp claws can be easily deformed so
you should avoid pressing it tightly with your fingers.
●Follow the same procedure to attach all the nozzle holders to
the transfer head.

Attaching the nozzle holder
12
Turn down the
13 end of the 14 Clean the shaft
inspection
Periodic
Periodic
cleaning paper
Every
140
hours
●Insert the cleaning tool into
the shaft, and turn it in the
direction of nozzle rotation
two to three times.
●Replace the paper when it
becomes dirty.
16 Attach the nozzle holder 15 Remove the

spring
●Push the nozzle holder up with
a finger and make sure that it
does not get stuck, and remove
the finger and make sure it
lowers by its own weight.
NOTICE
●If the holder gets stuck or does
not lower (→P.5-2-10 to 11)
■Without the nozzle

Cleaning tool Positioning pin
attached
●Use the nozzle holder shaft
cleaning tool (option).
●Align the groove on the 12-
nozzle cleaning side with the
positioning pin of the nozzle
holder. To 21
●Turn it clockwise as viewed from
below while pushing up the
cleaning tool.
Groove

Maintenance
Checking the nozzle arrangement
Attach the
21 feeder table 22 23
cover
(→P.3-3)
●Install the feeder
cart
●Only if production data

has been loaded, carry
out operations after 24
26 25 34
●For the rear,
27 Check the nozzle arrangement

●Check the screen for the nozzle arrangement of each
nozzle position.
●If the wrong nozzle is set, replace it with the correct one
after the step 2 , and do 21 .
NOTICE
* The dimensions of nozzle bases are measured in this
operation. Nozzles that have the same dimensions but
differ in nozzle type are not identified. So visually check for
the nozzle type when attaching nozzles.

inspection
Periodic
Periodic
Every
140
hours

Maintenance
Clean the sliding surfaces

Describes how to clean contamination being stuck to the transfer head shaft and the nozzle holder.
Tool used: Allen wrench (3 mm, 4 mm),Lint free cloth, cotton swab, cleaning paper
Lubricant: FL100 (N510059330AA),Grease:LCG100
Name 8-nozzle head Light weight 16-nozzle head
12-nozzle head
The set of the nozzle holder cleaning tool N610133913AA N610133914AA
Nozzle holder shaft cleaning tool N210130779AA N210151617AA
Nozzle holder refresh jig N510055113AA N510058697AA
Time required: 148 minutes for light weight 16-nozzle head, 116 minutes for 12-nozzle head, and 84 minutes
for 8-nozzle head.
●The following description takes the 12-nozzle head option as an example; however, the same procedure is
also applicable to the light weight 16- and 8-nozzle heads.
●How to remove the 12-nozzle holder (→P.5-2-2)
● Apply grease (LCG100) to the nozzle holder shaft cleaning tool and the nozzle holder refresh jigs after use,
and keep them in the dedicated case. The case shall be stored in the clean and less moisture place.
●Do not use the rusty nozzle holder shaft cleaning tool and the nozzle holder refresh jigs.
●Cover the multi-recognition camera with the lint free cloth to avoid dust adhesion before cleaning.
Wipe off Clean the

7 contamination 6
Perform steps
3 to 5
5 refresh jigs
on the shaft
Nozzle holder shaft
Nozzle holder ●Perform until the jig can be
cleaning tool
inserted smoothly.
NOTICE
●Do not insert it forcefully.
The jig may get stuck.
Alcohol-dampened cotton
Nozzle holder
swab
refresh jig
●Hold the nozzle holder by

Clean the nozzle Clean the nozzle
hand, and push and
horizontally rotate the 8 holder 9 holder cleaning
nozzle holder refresh jig. tool
●Use the lint free cloth not Nozzle holder
to come off the clamp refresh jig
claw and spring.
FL100-dampened cotton
swab
NOTICE
●Shake well before opening Alcohol-dampened cotton
the FL100. swab

1 Clean the refresh jigs 2 Clean the shaft
inspection
Periodic
Periodic
Alcohol-dampened lint Nozzle holder shaft
free cloth cleaning tool
Every
140
hours
●Insert the cleaning tool to
the shaft and rotate it two
or three times in a nozzle
rotation direction.
Nozzle holder Alcohol-dampened cotton ●If the paper becomes dirty,
refresh jigs swab replace it.
4 Clean the shaft 3 Wipe off contamination on

the shaft
●Hold the shaft by hand,

and push up and
horizontally rotate the
nozzle holder shaft
cleaning tool.
●Insert the cleaning tool to
the shaft and rotate it two
or three times in a nozzle
rotation direction.
●If the paper becomes dirty,
replace it.
Check the sliding

Perform steps
10 7 to 9
11 of the nozzle
holder.
●Perform until the jig can ●How to attach the nozzle
be inserted smoothly. holder (→P.5-2-7)
●If it does not slide smoothly,
repeat steps from 1 to 10 .
NOTICE
●Do not insert it forcefully.
The jig may get stuck.

Maintenance
Cleaning the nozzle
5-3 holder 1 (2-nozzle head: option)
Cleaning parts
Tool used: Air blow gun, lint free cloth, cotton swab, Allen wrench (2.5 mm), spanner (7 mm)
Time required: 30 minutes per head
Nozzle holder
Nozzle holder taper surface
(If dust settles, it could cause a
pickup error or affect placement
accuracy due to air leaks caused
by the nozzle holder taper surface
that cannot keep in absolute
contact with the nozzle taper
surface while the nozzle is
securely fixed in place)
Nozzle reflector
●The reflector, made of black-
resin, is covered with special
coating that helps prevent
scratches. It recognizes
components by reflecting LED
light. (If dust settles, it could
cause recognition errors)
Nozzle tip (Nozzle section)

●Picks up components.
(If dust settles on the side of the
tip, it could casts a shadow
during recognition, thus causing
a recognition error. And also, if
dust settles on the pickup hole,
it could cause a pickup error)
Pickup pad
●For the purpose of achieving
more stable pickups, the rubber
pad is attached to the nozzle tip.
(Cracks in the pickup pad could
cause a pickup error due to air
leaks)
∗∗ Nozzle taper surface

∗∗∗ ●The part that is grasped in the
chuck of the transfer head’s
nozzle holder. (If dust settles on
the taper surface and the
chucking groove, it could cause
air leaks or chucking problem)
Chucking groove

Removing the nozzle
●For the rear,
inspection
Periodic
Detach the
Periodic
1 2 3 feeder cart
(→P.3-2)
SERVO
Every
140
ON hours
●Y-axis of the front head

●For feeder specification,
Y-axis of the rear head
moves to the rear side,
and for tray specification,
it moves to the front side.
Remove the
6 feeder table 5 4
cover
(→P.3-3) SERVO
OFF
●Work at the front side for
front feeder specification
and rear tray specification.
●Work at the rear side for
rear feeder specification.
7 Remove the nozzle

●Move the head to the position where your workability enhances.
●Hold and pull down the edge of the nozzle reflector.
To 8
NOTICE
●Pull it straight out. If pulled out at an angle, the clamp claws could
be damaged.

Maintenance
Cleaning the nozzle
Cleaning the nozzle holder
8 Clean the nozzle holder taper surface
Nozzle holder
taper surface
Absolute alcohol-
dampened swab
Lubricate the oil groove with

9 grease Clamp claw
●Wipe off grease adhering to any
parts other than the oil groove with
a cotton swab.
●Grease: BARRIERTA IEL/V
Oil groove (1 location)
10 Remove the nozzle filter
Spanner (7 mm) Nozzle holder

(for rotation stop)
Nozzle filter
Allen wrench: Turn it Nozzle filter

counterclockwise as
viewed from below
Allen wrench

Clean with an air
11 blow gun 12 Attach the nozzle filter
inspection
Periodic
Periodic
Nozzle filter Air blow
gun (tip)
Spanner (7 mm)
(for rotation Every
140
stop) hours
Nozzle filter
Allen wrench:
Turn it clockwise
as viewed from
below.
●Blow in the opposite

direction of the Allen Nozzle holder
wrench insertion. The
●The filter is small, so be careful
filter is small so ensure
not to drop it.
that it is not blown off. ●Spread cloth over the machine in
advance to prevent the filter from
dropping inside the machine.
●If you cannot remove dust, replace
the filter.
Filter No.: N610009394AB
Nozzle filter
Allen wrench
Check the θ-direction stopper

13
Nozzle holder
Nozzle θ-direction stopper
●Set it so that the protrusion of the

θ -direction stopper is aligned To 14
with the narrower groove on the
nozzle brim. If set in reverse, the
placement accuracy is reduced
due to backlash.

Maintenance
Cleaning the nozzle
Attaching the nozzle
14 Attach the nozzle

Inscription
(nozzle No.) Narrow groove
●Align the narrow groove with
the θ -direction stopper and
lift the nozzle vertically.
∗
∗∗
∗∗
●Check if it is grasped in
chuck.
●Make sure that the nozzle
attachment position is correct.
Wide groove Nozzle taper surface
15 Attach the
feeder table 16 17
cover SERVO
(→P.3-3)
ON
18 Attach the feeder

cart (→P.3-2)
To 19

Checking the nozzle arrangement
19 20
inspection
Periodic
Periodic
Every
140
hours
●Only if production data

has been loaded, carry
out operations after
20
23 22 21
●For the rear,
24 Check the nozzle arrangement

●Check the screen for the nozzle arrangement of each
nozzle position.
●If the wrong nozzle is set, replace it with the correct one
after the step 6 , and do 15 to 18 .
NOTICE
The dimensions of nozzle bases are measured in this
operation. Nozzles that have the same dimensions but differ
in nozzle type are not identified. So visually check for the
nozzle type when attaching nozzles.

Cleaning the PCB-support
Maintenance
5-4 blocks (for automatic change)(option) 1

Describes cleaning of the PCB-support block(for automatic change)(option).
●If a foreign body such as dust is present in the PCB-support block and the PCB holder, it could cause
attachment problems with the PCB-support block, thus damaging PCBs.
Tool used: Lint free cloth Time required: 10 minutes
CAUTION
The arrangement of the PCB support block on the rear side vary between single lane mode and dual lane
mode. (See below)
■Arrangement on ■Arrangement on
single lane mode dual lane mode
B
B
A A
* If you wrongly install the PCB support block of A with B, you cannot change to the arrangement in single
lane mode.
PCB support block Product No. / Block arrangement

Number of blocks (rear side)
N610153810AB
A
(one block)
N610153811AB
B
(Two blocks)

Detach the
1 2 Confirm the
3 feeder cart
inspection
message
Periodic
Periodic
(→P.3-2)
ENABLING ENABLING
Every
140
hours
(X-axes in the front and

rear move to the
retraction position)
(The PCB-support block Front side
moves upward)
Cover the multi-

6 recognition 5 4
camera with a lint
SERVO
free cloth
OFF
Remove the PCB-support

7 Detach the
feeder table
8 block
cover PCB-support block
(→P.3-3)
●Be careful not to drop an
object on the multi-
recognition camera (on the
LED light) or bump the line
camera. To 9
●If there are support pins on
the PCB support block, be
careful not to fall them.

Maintenance
5-4 blocks (for automatic change)(option) 2
Clean the PCB holder and Attach the PCB-support block as it

9 the PCB-support block 10 is no tilt
(It may interfere with the rail)
●Clean the top surface of the PCB

support block (for automatic change)
with a lint free cloth dampened with
alcohol.
●Be careful not to scratch coating
material on the surface of the PCB
support block (for automatic change) by
sharps.
PCB-support block
Attach the
13 12 Remove the lint
free cloth
11 feeder table
cover (→P.3-3)
14 15 Attach the feeder

cart (→P.3-2)
16
SERVO
ENABLING
ON
Front side

NOTICE
inspection
Periodic
Periodic
●While you clean the PCB support block, check the support pin conditions as well. (If flux is
contaminated on the tip of the support pin, wipe it off using a lint free cloth.)
ATTENTION Every
140
hours
●Do not apply strong impact on the support pin for automatic change such as dropping. It may
deform the pin. Do not use a deformed pin.
●Be careful not to clog the vacuum vent for the support pin (for automatic change).
Vacuum vent
Confirm the
17 message
ENABLING
(Make sure the PCB-support

block moves downward to
the original position)

Maintenance
5-5 blocks (for batch exchange) (option) 1
Describes cleaning of the PCB-support block (for batch exchange)(option).

●If a foreign body such as dust is present in the PCB-support block and the PCB holder, it could cause
attachment problems with the PCB-support block, thus damaging PCBs.
CAUTION
The arrangement of the PCB support block on the rear side vary between single lane mode and dual lane
mode. (See below)
■Arrangement on ■Arrangement on
single lane mode dual lane mode
B
B
A A
* If you wrongly install the PCB support block of A with B, you cannot change to the arrangement in single
lane mode.
PCB support Product No. / Block arrangement

block Number of blocks (rear side)
N610150726AC
A
(one block)
N610153271AB
B
(Two blocks)

Detach the feeder
1 2 Confirm the
3 cart (→P.3-2)
inspection
message
Periodic
Periodic
ENABLING ENABLING
Every
140
hours
(X-axes in the front and

rear move to the
retraction position)
(The PCB-support block
moves upward) Front side
Cover the multi-

6 recognition 5 4
camera with a lint SERVO
free cloth
OFF
7 Detach the 8 Remove the PCB-support block

feeder table
cover PCB-support block
(→P.3-3)
●Be careful not to drop an
object on the multi-
recognition camera (on the
LED light) or bump the line
camera. To 9
●If there are support pins on
the PCB support block, be
careful not to fall them.

Maintenance
5-5 blocks (for batch exchange)(option) 2
Clean the PCB holder and Attach the PCB-support block as it

9 the PCB-support block 10 is no tilt
(It may interfere with the rail)
●Clean the top surface of the PCB

support block (for batch exchange) with
a lint free cloth dampened with alcohol.
●Be careful not to scratch coating
material on the surface of the PCB
support block (for batch exchange) by
sharps.
PCB-support block
Attach the
13 12 Remove the lint
free cloth
11 feeder table
cover (→P.3-3)
14 15 Attach the feeder

cart (→P.3-2)
16
SERVO ENABLING
ON
Front side

NOTICE
inspection
Periodic
●While you clean the PCB support block, check the support pin conditions as well. (If flux is
Periodic
contaminated on the tip of the support pin, wipe it off using a lint free cloth.)
Every
140
hours
17 Confirm
message
the
ENABLING
(Make sure the PCB-support

block moves downward to
the original position)

Maintenance
Cleaning the cover
5-6 glass (multi-recognition camera)
Describes cleaning of the multi-recognition camera’s cover glass.

If you clean the cover glass of the machine whose rear side is tray specifications, use a step ladder as
necessary.
Tool used: Lint free cloth Time required: 5 minutes (Total time required for both the front and rear sides)
1 Detach the 2 3
feeder cart
(→P.3-2) SERVO
OFF
Remove a foreign body including dust Push the X-axis

5 from the cover glass 4 beam inward
Cover glass ●Be sure not to deform the
light resistance plate.
(Deformation could cause
recognition errors)
●Be careful not to scratch
the cover glass surface
while cleaning it with a soft
lint free cloth. (Scratches
may hinder proper image
capture)
Light resistance plate
Attach the
6 7 8 feeder cart
(→P.3-2)
SERVO
ON

Cleaning the feeder table
Maintenance
5-7 (feeder cart: option)
Describes cleaning of the feeder attachment face of the feeder cart.

Tool used: Vacuum cleaner, brush Time required: 15 minutes per location
Feeder cart
1 2
inspection
Periodic
Periodic
SERVO
OFF
Every
140
hours
3 Clean the feeder table 4

●Clean the feeder installation face after removing tape feeders.
(A cause of deformation in the feeder cart.)
●Clean the feeder table using a
vacuum cleaner or brush.
●Do not use an air blow gun in cleaning.
(A foreign body including dust could scatter inside the machine,
thus worsening placement quality, or breaking down the
machine.)
Feeder table
5
SERVO
ON

Maintenance Cleaning the table
5-8 surface
(tray feeder drawer: option)
Describes cleaning of the table surface of the tray feeder drawer.

●Before cleaning it, ensure that the magazine is removable. (→P.6-14)
1 2 SERVO
3
ENABLING OFF
(The tray feeder drawer

moves to the maintenance
position)
5 4 Clean the table surface

●Wipe off with a soft lint free cloth.
Tray feeder drawer

table surface
6 SERVO
ON

Maintenance
Cleaning the calibration
5-9 jig (2D inspection head: option)
Describes cleaning of the 2D inspection calibration jig (option).

Tool used: Blower brush Time required: 1 minute
Detach the
1 2 3
inspection
feeder cart
Periodic
Periodic
(→P.3-2)
SERVO
OFF Every
140
hours
Clean the calibration plates with the blower Push the X-axis
5 brush 4 inward
Calibration jigs ●Remove the calibration jig out of the
machine; then, using the supplied
blower brush, remove dust from the
gray-colored acrylic calibration plate,
the light-colored acrylic calibration
plate, and the glass calibration plate.
●After cleaning, put the calibration jig
back in its original position.
●Do not touch the surface with figures.
(If it may get damaged or stained,
there is a possibility of poor
calibration)
Attach the
6 7 8 feeder cart
(→ P.3-2)

Maintenance Cleaning and checking the
5-10 dummy dispensing plate
Describes cleaning and checking of the dummy dispensing plate (option).

Tool used: None Time required: 2 minutes per location
1 2 3
SERVO
ENABLING
OFF

exchange position.
Dampen a cloth with alcohol and wipe away Turn the feed side
3
5 dirt on the dummy dispensing plate 4 reel in a clockwise
direction to loosen
the dummy
Dummy dispensing plate ●Visually check if there is no dispensing tape
scratch or contamination.
If so, dispensing condition Take-up side
of adhesive is wrongly
recognized, resulting in the
wrong feedback of
dispensing amount.
Feed side
Turn the feed

6 side reel in a 7 8
counterclockwis SERVO
e direction to
ON
stretch the
dumpy
dispensing tape

Every-560-hours
Greasing the PCB
Maintenance
6-1 conveyor 1
Describes the method for greasing the PCB conveyor.

Tool used: Grease gun, Time required: 20 minutes
●Apply grease to the width-adjustment ball screws, linear guides and ball spline of the PCB conveyor.
●It describes at the feeder cart side. The tray feeder must be disconnected before work. (→ P.13-8)
●This work should be performed in the dual lane mode. (→ P.10-2-1)
Detach the
1 2 Confirm the
message
3 feeder cart
(→P.3-2)
ENABLING ENABLING
●Confirm there is no
support pins before work.
Detach the
6 feeder table 5 4
cover SERVO
(→P.3-3)
OFF

7 Grease the width-adjustment ball screws, linear guides, and ball splines
inspection
Periodic
Periodic
of the PCB conveyor.
Width-adjustment Every
Lane 2 left Width-adjustment Lane 2 right 560
ball screw *1) hours
(grease nipple) ball screw *1)
(grease nipple)
Linear guide *2)
Ball spline *3)
Linear guide *2)
Linear guide *3)
Lane 1 left Lane 1 right
Width-adjustment Width-adjustment
ball screw *1) ball screw *1)
(grease nipple) (grease nipple)
For a ball screw

*1)
●Apply grease via each grease nipple (on the movable rail) with the grease gun.
(about 0.9 cm3 per pump)
●Grease: LCG100
*2) For a linear guide rail To 8

●Apply grease directly near the linear guide rail.
●Grease: LCG100
*3) For a ball spline

●Apply grease directly near the center of the ball spline.
●Grease: LCG100

Maintenance
Greasing the PCB
6-1 conveyor 2
Attach the
8 feeder table 9 10
cover SERVO
(→P.3-3)
ON
Attach the
13 12 11 feeder cart
(→P.3-2)
ENABLING
■Select a lane;
W1 or W2
14 Confirm the message 15

STOP
ENABLING
●Make sure that there is no pin on

the PCB plate.
●Continuously moves the width
adjustment axis of the transfer
conveyor at least five round.

inspection
Periodic
Periodic
Every
560
hours

Greasing the conveyor
Maintenance
6-2 L conveyor R (option) 1
Describes the method for greasing the conveyor L, conveyor R.

Tool used: Grease gun, Time required: 10 minutes
●Apply grease to the width-adjustment ball screws, linear shaft and ball spline of the PCB conveyor.
●This work should be performed in the dual lane mode. (→ P.10-2-1)
1 2 Confirm the
message
3
SERVO
ENABLING ENABLING OFF
●Confirm there is no
support pins before work.
4 Open the
conveyor top
cover

5 Grease the width-adjustment ball screws, linear shaft, and ball splines of
inspection
Periodic
Periodic
the conveyor L, conveyor R.
■Conveyor L (N-CONL), Conveyor R(N-CONR) Every

560
hours
Top cover
Ball spline *3)
Width-adjustment ball screw *1)

(grease nipple)
Linear shaft *2)
*1) For a ball screw

●Apply grease via each grease nipple (on the movable rail) with the grease gun.
(about 0.9 cm3 per pump)
●Grease: LCG100
*2) For a linear shaft rail

●Apply grease directly near the linear shaft rail.
●Grease: LCG100
*3) For a ball spline

To 6
●Apply grease directly near the center of the ball spline.
●Grease: LCG100

Maintenance
Greasing the conveyor
6-2 L conveyor R (option) 2
6 Close the
conveyor top
7 8
cover SERVO
ON
■Select a lane
W1 or W2
10 Confirm the message 9

ENABLING
ENABLING
●Make sure that there is no pin on

the PCB plate.
●Continuously moves the

transfer conveyor width
adjustment axis at least five
rounds.
11
STOP

inspection
Periodic
Periodic
Every
560
hours

Maintenance
Greasing the XY-axis
6-3 linear guide 1
Describes the method for greasing the XY-axis linear guide of the XY unit.
Tool used: Grease gun, lint free cloth Time required: 20 minutes
●Grease the front and rear sides
1
Detach the
feeder cart 2 3
(→P.3-2)
SERVO
OFF
7 Apply grease to the X-axis linear guide
●Adjust the position of the grease nipple. Grease nipple Grease nipple
①Move the block so that the

tip of the grease nipple ②Insert the metal cap
comes to near by the center into the grease
of the rail hole nipple
Move
Block
Metal Grease nipple Grease nipple
Tip of grease Center of the cap
nipple tip rail hole
●Apply grease to both top and bottom grease nipples in the following steps.
①Give one quarter pump (about 0.25 cm3)
②Move the X-axis about 100mm.
③Give one quarter pump (about 0.25 cm3)
●Grease: LG100
●In order to prevent grease from dropping onto the glass surface of the recognition
device, move the X-axis toward the supply section beforehand.
●Please note that the tip of grease gun should not be drawn into the magnetic linear
motor.
(X-axis linear motor stator (magnet) of the cover may cause deformation.
●Top and bottom grease nipples (4 locations)

Detach the Cover the multi-recognition camera with a
4 feeder table 5 lint free cloth
inspection
Periodic
Periodic
cover ●To prevent adhesion of grease dropped onto the camera
(→P.3-3) lenses during maintenance
Every
560
hours
6 Wipe away the old grease

●Wipe the old grease off the X-and Y-axis linear
guides with a clean lint free cloth.
X-axis linear guide Y-axis linear guide
To 8
WARNING
Personnel with pacemakers should keep away from the linear
motor

Maintenance
6-3 linear guide 2
Move the X- and

8 Apply grease to the Y-axis linear guide 9 Y- axis several
●Inject grease into each of the two grease nipples a and b times
on the drive side and the one grease nipple on the driven
side. ●Move X-axis along the
①Give one half pump (about 0.5 cm3)
entire stroke, and move
②Move the Y-axis about 150mm.
Y-axis several times at
③Give one half pump (about 0.5 cm3)
least 300 mm to disperse
●Grease: LG100
the grease throughout the
linear guides.
Grease nipple for linear guide
on the drive side
Grease nipple for

driven linear guide
a b
●Grease nipple position

10 Wipe any excess grease off
inspection
Periodic
Periodic
●Wipe any excess grease off from X-and Y-axis linear guides or adhered grease out of travel
surfaces.
Drive Y-axis linear guide Grease squeezed out Driven Y-axis linear guide Grease squeezed out Every
560
hours
●Visually check the installation hole in the linear guide rail from the opposite axis, and wipe off
excess grease, if any.
X-axis linear guide Installation hole in the
linear-guide rail
Grease squeezed out Excess grease
11 Check the grease sumps

●Wipe off any grease squeezed out.
Grease sump under Grease sump under
Y-axis (left) Y-axis (right)
To 12
Grease sump under X-axis

Maintenance
6-3 linear guide 3
12 Attach the
feeder table 13 14
cover SERVO
(→P.3-3)
ON
(Front and rear)
23 Select a table 22 Select Y-axis 21 10 shuttle
ENABLING
24 Select X-axis 25 Select a table 26 Select Y-axis

Detach the
15 feeder cart 16 17
inspection
Periodic
Periodic
(→P.3-2)
Every
560
hours
20 Select X-axis 19 Select a table 18
Detach the
27 feeder cart 28 29
(→P.3-2) SERVO
OFF
To 30
(Front and rear)

Maintenance
6-3 linear guide 4
30 Wipe off the grease that ran out of the edging 31
●See steps 10 and 11 .

●Check linear guide rail edge and grease nipples whether any
liquefied grease is adhered; if any has, wipe on a regular basis.
(Front and rear)
33 Attach the
feeder cart
32
(→P.3-2) SERVO
ON

inspection
Periodic
Periodic
Every
560
hours

Maintenance
Greasing the nozzle
6-4 holder
Explains the method for greasing the nozzle holder using the 12-nozzle head as an example; however, the
same procedure is also applicable to the light weight 16-and 8-nozzle head.
Tool used: Syringe (BARRIERTA IEL/V)
Time required: 20 minutes for light weight 16-nozzle head, 15 minutes for 12-nozzle head, and 10 minutes for
8-nozzle head.
Detach the
1 nozzle holder 2 Refill grease to the oil groove at the clamp
claw
(→P.5-2)
●With the clamp claw attached, apply grease using a small flat-
head screwdriver.
(To prevent grease from adhering to the portions around the
clamp claws)
●Wipe off any grease adhering to portions other than the oil
groove using a cotton swab.
●Be careful no grease adheres to the filter on the nozzle holder tip.
●Ensure that clamp claws are inserted to oil grooves before
installing the nozzle holder to the transfer head.
Grease
Oil Clamp claw
groove
Clamp claw
Apply grease to the contact surface of the

3 clamp claw and the spring for the clamp claw
pusher
Contact
surface
●Apply grease lightly using a syringe.


Cleaning the nozzle (option) and
Maintenance
6-5 the nozzle changer (option) 1
Explains the method for cleaning a nozzle and a nozzle changer.
Name and role of nozzle parts

E
C Nozzle tip (nozzle section)
inspection
Periodic
Periodic
This is the part that comes into direct
contact with a component and picks it up.
A (Foreign bodies on the side results in a
recognition error. Leaving the pickup hole
dirty results in a pickup error) Every
D 560
hours
B
C
D Nozzle inside
(Foreign objects adhering inside the
nozzle hinder the pickup and placement
of components, and various detection
A Nozzle taper surface
This is the part to be chucked by the
functions using vacuum pressure)
nozzle holder of placement head.

( Foreign bodies and contamination of the
taper surface and chucking groove can
Nozzle flange upper surface
cause an air leak and faulty chucking)
E The nozzle type and serial No. are shown
by the 2D code. The 2D code area is
B Nozzle reflector
This is a black-resin part. Parts are
recognized by the head camera.
(Leaving this part dirty results in a
recognized by reflecting the LED light from recognition error)
the multi-recognition camera.
(Leaving this part dirty results in a
recognition error)
Nozzle changer
This is the unit that stocks nozzles. The transfer

head automatically changes nozzles before placing
components are changed.
●Slide the shutter to the left when you manually
insert or remove nozzles.
Nozzle changer upper surface
(Any contamination of the nozzle changer
upper surface allows contaminants to adhere
to the nozzle reflector, resulting in
recognition errors)
Shutter
Shutter bearings
Nozzle (Two each on both front and rear)
Front side

Maintenance
For light weight 16-, 12-, 8-nozzle head 1

The following description takes the 12-nozzle head as an example; however, the same procedure is also
applicable to the light weight 16-and 8-nozzle head. Tool used: Lint free cloth, air blow gun, swabs, nozzle
cleaning pin φ0.4(KXF0DYHTA00), nozzle cleaning pin φ0.15(KXF0DYHUA00)
Time required: 20 minutes for light weight 16-nozzle head, 15 minutes for 12-nozzle head, and 10 minutes for
8-nozzle head.
1 2 Detach the
nozzle holder
(→P.5-2)
■To clean nozzles installed on the placement
head
to 2 ●Perform from step 5
■To clean nozzles stored in the nozzle changer
to 3
7 Clean nozzles
■Nozzle taper surface and ■Nozzle tip
nozzle flange upper surface
●Confirm that there is no Nozzle tip
dust or scratches on the
2D code.
Nozzle taper
surface
Nozzle flange upper
surface
■Nozzle reflector ■Nozzle inside

Nozzle-cleaning
pin
Shank
ATTENSION
●In this step, do not use any solvent. ●Insert the nozzle-cleaning pin from the
(The nozzle reflector could be nozzle upper side (the shank side), and
discolored, deformed, or peeled off of push out contamination accumulated
adhesives.) inside of the nozzle.

inspection
Remove the Remove a
Periodic
Periodic
3 nozzle changer 4 nozzle from the 5 Check the nozzle
tip
(→[Operating nozzle changer
procedure] P.2-5-1) (→[Operating Every
procedure] P.2-5-2) 560
hours
Nozzle
Worn out nozzle tip
6 Remove dust from the air path of the nozzle

Nozzle air path
Air gun
Nozzle Deformation of a
nozzle tip
●If the nozzle tip is worn
●Blow a blast of air at the nozzle tip. Be careful not to hit out or deformed, replace
the air blow gun against the nozzle tip. the nozzle with a new
(The nozzle tip could be damaged or deformed) one.
8 Wipe the top face of the nozzle changer
●Clean the changer for 12/Light weight16-nozzle

head with a swab and the changer for 8-nozzle head
with a lint free cloth.
●Do not leave behind any contamination on the face
in contact with the nozzle reflectors. To 9
●Confirm that there are no foreign objects jammed
between the space of the shutter and the nozzle
changer.
Nozzle changer

Maintenance
For light weight 16-,12-, 8-nozzle head 2
9 Set the nozzles

Nozzle changer
●Set the nozzles to the transfer head. Nozzle
(→P.5-3).
●Set the nozzles back into the original place

in the nozzle changer.
●Checking the arrangement on the

screen, set them securely.
11 10 Set the nozzle changer
Nozzle changer
●How to attach
(→『 Operating procedure 』
P.2-5-1)
12
SERVO
ON

Cleaning nozzles (using an ultrasonic cleaner)
Tool used: An ultrasonic cleaner Time required: 15 minutes
●The use of an ultrasonic cleaner can be a faster way to clean the nozzles than using a cleaning pin.
For information about the ultrasonic cleaner, please contact us.
Place a pallet to the nozzle-cleaning

1
inspection
Periodic
Periodic
basket The height of the
●Set the nozzle with nozzle-cleaning
its tip pointing basket can be
preset in two levels. Every
downward. 560
There are two hours
●Choose the pallet in types for pallet
accordance with the mounting holes.
length and shape of
the nozzle. Basket: Model No.: 1998114111
Pallet (φ3.2 mm): Model No. 1998114112
Ultrasonic nozzle cleaner Pallet (φ5.1 mm): Model No. 1998114113
(Model No.: 510016591AA )
3 Clean 2 Pour purified water into the ultrasonic

nozzle cleaner
●The cleaning time Nozzle cleaning
Pallet
should not basket
exceed 10 minutes. Nozzle
Ultrasonic cleaner
3 mm 2 to 4 mm
Purified water
(40 ℃)
●Do not immerse the nozzle reflector in purified water.
(The nozzle reflector may come off)
Dismount the NOTICE

4 nozzles, and blow 5 Wipe off water
on the nozzle ●Do not use cleaning solvents
away water inside
reflectors such as alcohol.
the nozzles with ●After cleaning, dry the nozzle
an air blow gun well so as not to leave any water
Air blowing position inside.
●For adherents that cannot be
removed even with the use of a
ultrasonic nozzle cleaner, clean
them off with a pin.

Maintenance
For 2-nozzle head 1

●The following description takes the 2-nozzle head as an example.
Tool used: Lint free cloth, air blow gun Time required: 15 minutes
●If the nozzle has any surface flaws on the nozzle section or the nozzle reflector, replace it with a new one.
For how to detach and attach the nozzle, see (→P.5-3)
1 2 Remove the
nozzles
■To clean nozzles installed on the head (→P5-3)
●Go to the step 7 .
to 2
■To clean nozzles stored in the head changer
to 3
8 Remove dust from the air path of the nozzle
Air path of the nozzle

Air gun
Nozzle
●Blow a blast of air at the nozzle tip. Be careful not to hit

the air blow gun against the nozzle tip.
(The nozzle tip could be damaged or deformed)
Wipe the nozzle taper surface and the nozzle

9 flange upper surface with a lint free cloth
Nozzle flange upper

surface
●Confirm that there is no dust or

scratches on the 2D code.

inspection
Confirm the axis Remove the
Periodic
3 4 5
Periodic
stopped, and turn nozzle changer
OFF the servo (→ [Operating
procedure] P.2-5-1)
SERVO Every
560
hours
OFF
Check wear-out and deformation of the Remove nozzles

7 nozzle tip 6 from the nozzle
●If the nozzle tip resembles the figures below, replace the changer
nozzle. (→[Operating procedure]
P.2-5-2)
Deformation of a
Worn out nozzle tip
nozzle tip Nozzle
Wipe the
10 nozzle tip with 11 Wipe the nozzle reflector with a lint free cloth
a lint free cloth

Lint free cloth
Nozzle tip
Nozzle
To 12
ATTENSION
●In this step, do not use any solvent.
(The nozzle reflector could be discolored, deformed, or peeled
off of adhesives)

Maintenance
For 2-nozzle head 2
12 Clean the nozzle inside
Nozzle cleaning pin
Shank
●Insert a nozzle cleaning pin and push lodgment out of the nozzle upper
part (the shank side) in the nozzle inside.
17 16 Set the nozzle changer
Nozzle changer
●How to attach
(→『 Operating procedure 』
P.2-5-1)
18
SERVO
ON

13 Detach the damaged pickup pad
inspection
Periodic
Periodic
●There is a nozzle that an absorption pad sticks to in order to be stable,
and to absorb a part.
If there is a scratch or a crack to this absorption pad, change the Every
absorption pad or the nozzle itself. 560
(e.g., the 1004th nozzle, the 1005th nozzle) hours
Attach the new

15 Clean the nozzle changer top surface 14 absorption pad
Lint free cloth
●Be careful not to leave

behind any contamination
on the face in contact with
the nozzle reflectors.
●Confirm that there is no
foreign object jammed
between the space of the
shutter and the nozzle
changer.
Nozzle changer

Maintenance
Inspecting the
6-6 conveyor 1
Describes how to inspect the PCB conveyor, the conveyor L , the conveyor R.
Tool used: Belt tension meter Time required: 5 minutes for PCB conveyor each 2 minutes for conveyor L ,
tconveyor R
Inspecting the PCB conveyor belt
1 Adjust the
conveyor width
2 Detach the
feeder cart 3
of 150mm (For (→P.3-2)
SERVO
better
OFF
workability
(→[Operating
procedure] P.2-5-4)
11 Attach the
feeder cart 10 9
(→P.3-2)
SERVO
ON

inspection
Periodic
Periodic
Detach the
4 5 Push the X-axis
inward
6 feeder table
cover Every
(→P.3-3) 560
hours
Attach the
8 feeder table 7 Check the belt Belt Pulley
cover
(→P.3-3)
●Rotate the belt with hands and replace it if any flaw,

contamination or wear out is found.
●Six belts on each lane (See the figure below)
Fixed side
Lane 2
Movable side
Movable side
Lane 1
Fixed side

Maintenance
Inspecting the
6-6 conveyor 2
Inspecting the conveyor L , the conveyor R
Open the
1 Adjust the
conveyor width
2 3 conveyor top
of 150mm (For cover
SERVO
better
OFF
workability
(→[Operating
procedure] P.2-5-4)
Close the
6 5 conveyor top
cover
SERVO
ON

inspection
Periodic
Periodic
4 Check the belt
Belt Every
560
hours
Pulley
●Rotate the belt with hands and replace it if any flaw,

contamination or wear out is found.
●Two belts on each lane (see the figure below)
Fixed side
Lane 2
Movable side
Movable side
Lane 1
Fixed side

Maintenance
Inspecting the
6-6 conveyor 3
Inspecting the belt tension on the PCB conveyor

●Enter the following numerical values to the frequency measuring instrument (Acoustic belt tension meter
provided by a belt manufacturer) in advance. Flicking your fingers at the center section (P shown in the
drawings below) of each span, measure the natural frequency with the frequency measuring instrument.
Input value
Belt unit mass 0.7 g/m
Belt width 4.5 mm
Span length See below
●Adjust and fix the tension pulley if the measurement value falls under the prescribed value.
■Short specification
Prescribed value
Inspection
Lane 1: Fixed side Lane 1: Movable side Lane 2: Movable side Lane 2: Fixed side
location
P1 810 to 900 Hz 270 to 300 Hz 270 to 300 Hz 810 to 900 Hz
■Lane 1: Fixed side Tension pulley (Unit ：mm)
37 73
P1 P3
P2
116
Tension pulley
■Lane 1: Movable side Tension pulley
73
P1 P3
112 P2
Tension pulley
116
■Lane 2: Movable side Tension pulley
P1
Tension pulley 112 47 P2 P3
85
■Lane 2: Fixed side Tension pulley
P1 37
P2 P3
Tension pulley
47 85

■Long specification
Prescribed value
Inspection
Lane 1: Fixed side Lane 1: Movable side Lane 2: Movable side Lane 2: Fixed side
location
inspection
Periodic
Periodic
P3 415 to 455 Hz 415 to 455 Hz 355 to 395 Hz 355 to 395 Hz Every

560
(Unit ：mm) hours
■Lane 1: Fixed side Tension pulley
P1 P3
P2
73
40 116
Tension pulley
Tension pulley
■Lane 1: Movable side
P3
P1 P2
Tension pulley 95 73
116
■Lane 2: Movable side
Tension pulley
P1 P2
Tension pulley 95 P3
47 85
■Lane 2: Fixed side
Tension pulley
P1 P2 P3
47 85
40
Tension pulley

Maintenance
Inspecting the
6-6 conveyor 4
Inspecting the belt tension of the conveyor L , the conveyor R

●Enter the following numerical values to the frequency measuring instrument (Acoustic belt tension meter
provided by a belt manufacturer) in advance. Flicking your fingers at the center section (P shown in the
drawings below) of each span, measure the natural frequency with the frequency measuring instrument.
Input value
Belt unit mass 0.7 g/m
Belt width 4.5 mm
Span length See below
●Adjust and fix the tension pulley if the measurement value falls under the prescribed value.
Prescribed value
Model Common to both fix and movable sides

Conveyor L
560 to 695 Hz
Conveyor R
■Lane 1: Fixed side, Movable side (Unit ：mm)
P 64 Tension pulley
■Lane 2: Fixed side, Movable side
P 64 Tension pulley

inspection
Periodic
Periodic
Every
560
hours

Maintenance
Cleaning the large
6-7 reflector (2-nozzle head: option)
Describes how to clean the large reflector.

●Leaving the large reflector dirty results in an recognition error.
●For tray feeder specification, move Y-axis of the rear side to the front and work at the front.
1 2 3
SERVO
OFF
●Y-axis of the front head

●For feeder specification, Y-
axis of the rear head
moves to the rear side, and
for tray specification, it
11 10
SERVO
ENABLING
ON

inspection
Periodic
Periodic
Every
560
hours
Detach the Remove the Wipe the large

4 feeder table 5 nozzle from the 6 reflector with a
cover placement head clean lint free
(→P.3-3) cloth
●Pull the nozzle out and

down. Large reflector
Attach the Attach the

9 8 feeder table 7 nozzle to the
cover placement head
(→P.3-3)

Cleaning the vacuum
Maintenance
6-8 pump filter
Describes how to clean the vacuum pump filter.

Tool used: Allen wrench Time required: 30 minutes
●Be careful not to hit your head during the maintenance work.
Turn OFF the Remove the

1 power and lock 2 feeder cart or 3 Detach the
cover
the machine tray feeder of the Cover
rear side
●How to detach
・For a feeder cart
(→P.3-2)
・For a tray feeder
(→P.13-8)
●Seven screws
Unlock the Attach the feeder

9 machine and 8 cart or tray 7 Attach the cover
feeder of the rear Cover
ON
side
●How to attach
・For a feeder cart
(→P.3-2)
・For a tray feeder
(→P.13-8)
● Seven screws

Remove the filter Attach the filter
4 from the cover 5
inspection
to the cover
Periodic
Periodic
and clean it
●Use an air blow gun.
●Do not use an organic
solvent. Every
560
Filter Filter hours
6 Take out the filter element to clean
Vacuum pump
①Disassemble the filter unit.
②Eliminate dirt on the filter
element with an air blow
gun.
(No organic solvent should
be used)
③Put the filter unit back
together.
Head
Filter element
O-ring
Filter case
Ring

Inspecting the safety
Maintenance
6-9 switches
Checking the emergency stop switch

Describes how to check the emergency stop switch.
Tool used: None Time required: 2 minutes
●Origin return should be performed in advance.
Press the emergency stop switch

1 on the front side
Make sure the screen changes to the one
shown on the left.
2
Make sure the screen changes to the one
shown on the left.
Press the emergency stop switch

3 on the rear side and make sure
the screen changes to the one
shown on the left as in the case
of the front side

Checking the safety switch (safety cover)
Describes how to check the safety switch (safety cover).
Perform steps 1 through 3 at the front of the machine, and for step 4 , perform at the rear.
inspection
Periodic
Periodic
1 Every
560
1 hours
(The [Input confirm]screen is displayed.)
2 Press once.
3 Open the front cover and be

sure that the display color of
・[Safety cover 1] and
・[Safety cover 3]
changes from light blue to gray.
Open the rear cover and be sure

4 that the display color of
・[Safety cover 2] and
4 ・[Safety cover 4]
changes from light blue to gray.

Maintenance
Cleaning the PCB
6-10 detection sensors 1
Describes how to clean the PCB detection sensor. Remove the tray feeder before work. (→ P.13-8)
PCB conveyor
Tool used: Swabs Time required: 5 minutes
Adjust the Detach the

1 conveyor 2 feeder cart 3
width of 150mm (→P.3-2) SERVO
●For better workability OFF
(→[Operating
procedure] P.2-5-4)
Attach the
9 8 7 feeder table
SERVO cover
(→P.3-3)
ON
Attach the
10 feeder cart
(→P.3-2)

Detach the
4 5 feeder table
inspection
Periodic
Periodic
cover
(→P.3-3)
Every
560
hours
6 Clean the PCB detection sensors

●Use swabs.
●PCB detection sensor

Six ones on each of the light-emitting and the
light-receiving side in both lanes 1 and 2 PCB detection sensor

Maintenance
Cleaning the PCB
6-10 detection sensors 2
Conveyor L , Conveyor R
Tool used: Swabs, Allen wrench (3 mm) Time required: 2 minutes
Adjust the
1 conveyor width 2 3 Open the
conveyor top
of 150mm SERVO cover
(→[Operating OFF
procedure] P.2-5-4)
●For better workability.
Close the
5 conveyor top 4 Clean the PCB detection sensors
cover ●Use swabs.
●PCB detection sensor

Two ones on each of the light-emitting and the
light-receiving side in both lanes 1 and 2
PCB detection sensor
6
SERVO
ON

inspection
Periodic
Periodic
Every
560
hours

Maintenance
Inspecting the vacuum
6-11 air path (placement head: option)
Describes how to inspect the vacuum air path using the 12-nozzle head as an example; however, the same
procedure is also applicable to the light weight 16-and 8-nozzle head.
Tool used: None Time required: 2 minutes (per stage)
1 2
or
8 7
ENABLING
Return to step 5
and repeat the same
procedure for each
position (pos)
(The display color changes from

the light blue to the gray, and the
vacuum suction ends)

inspection
Periodic
Ensure that the
Periodic
3 nozzles are 4
absent from the
head ENABLING Every
560
●Detach if any. hours
A B
5
ENABLING
(The display color changes from gray to light blue,

and the vacuum suction starts)
6 Ensure the [pos1] is within the prescribed

value
●Prescribed value: value in the frame B is less than "-85".
●If the display value is not within the prescribed value range,
・Check the supply pressure of the vacuum pump (→P4-1-1)
・Clean the nozzle holders (→P5-2)
●If it still stays out of the prescribed value range, contact us.

Maintenance
Inspecting the θ-axis
6-12 belt (Placement head: option)
Describes how to inspect θ-axis belt by using the 12-nozzle head as an example; however, the same
procedure is also applicable to the light weight 16-and 8-nozzle head.
Tool used: Allen wrench (size: opposite side 2.0 mm (a ball-point-end) and 2.5 mm)
Time required: 10 minutes for light weight 16-nozzle head, 10-minutes for 12-nozzle head and 20 minutes for
8-nozzle head.
Detach the Turn OFF the

1 feeder cart 2 power and lock 3
(→P.3-2) the machine
OFF
4 Detach the head
●How to detach
→P.10-1-1
Unlock the
8 machine and 7 6 Attach the head
ON
●How to attach
(→P.10-1-3)

Insert an Allen wrench into the end of the θ-axis pulley of the head edge, and
5 then turn it around 10 times or more
inspection
Periodic
Periodic
■8-nozzle head ■12-nozzle head
θ-axis head Every

560
hours
θ-axis head
Allen wrench
Nozzle protection
Remove screws
(Two locations guard
each
on right and left) Allen wrench
Nozzle protection guard
θ-axis head
Allen wrench
*Use a ball-point-end Allen wrench (the
NOTICE one at the top of the photo above)
●It has no problem if showing no variations in the rotational torque.

●If showing some variations in the rotational torque (Rotational resistance can be either high
or low sometimes while turning it around), contact us.
●Two θ -axis motors are located on the right and left sides. Inspect both of them.
●For 8-nozzle head, remove the nozzle protection guard during inspection.
(For light weight 16-, and 12-nozzle, you do not need to remove it during inspection.)

Maintenance
Cleaning the components-
6-13 ejection conveyor (option)
Describes how to clean the components-ejection conveyor.

Install the components-ejection conveyor to the feeder cart that has been
1 disconnected from the machine, or to the feeder pedestal
●It is also acceptable to disconnect from the machine the feeder cart that has been installed
with the components-ejection conveyor.
●When handling the components-ejection conveyor, be careful not to hit the roller on the end.
2 Wipe dust off the surface of the conveyor belt and around the perimeter of
the components detection sensor
●Use a lint free cloth
Conveyor belt
Components
detection sensor

inspection
Periodic
Periodic
Every
560
hours

Maintenance
Greasing to the tray
6-14 feeder (option) 1
This section explains the procedure for a single tray feeder. Follow the same procedure for a twin tray feeder.
Tool used: Grease gun Time required: 20 minutes
1 2 3
SERVO
ENABLING
OFF
(The tray feeder drawer

moves to the maintenance
position.)
Open the magazine Push the X-axis

10 cover and remove 9 inward 8
the upper magazine SERVO
OFF
(→[Operating procedure]
P.2-4-2)

Apply grease via grease nipples to the vertical-axis ball screw and the
inspection
4
Periodic
Periodic
linear guide for the lifter
Ball screw
Every
560
Linear guide hours
●Apply grease via grease nipples
with a grease gun.
Give two pumps for each
(Approx. 1.8cm3)
●Grease: LCG100
7 6 SERVO
5
ENABLING ON
To 11

Maintenance
11 Apply grease to each point of the tray feeder drawer

●Greasing points
・Linear guide rails (right and left)
・Inside of cam plates (right and left)
・Linear guides (right and left)
・Inside of cam blocks (right and left)
●Grease: LCG100
●Wipe off any grease adhered to sensors.

Linear guide rail
Inside of cam plate
Linear guide
Inside of cam block

Pull drawer-axis of the tray feeder upper
13 surface toward you
inspection
●As the drawer is around the
Periodic
Periodic
magazine door, pull it toward you
as below.
Drawer-axis
Every
Drawer 560
hours
-axis
Place the drawer

Apply grease to each part of the tray
14 feeder drawer 15 back as its
●Greasing points original position
・Linear guide (right and left) Linear guide Drawer-axis
・Inside of cam plates (right and left)
●Grease: LCG100
Drawer-axis To 16
Cam plate
Greasing area
Drawer-axis
Front

Maintenance
Place the
16 magazines back 17 SERVO
18
in place and
close the
magazine cover ON ENABLING
(→[Operating procedure]
P.2-4-2)
19
Have it run for about a
minute, and then
STOP

inspection
Periodic
Periodic
Every
560
hours

Maintenance
Cleaning the slot
6-15 (tray feeder magazine: option)
Describes how to clean the tray feeder magazine slot.

1 Check the slots
Slot
●Visually check
whether the slots are
free from chipping,
racks or breaks.
2 Clean the slots
Slot
Lint free cloth
●Wipe it off with a soft dry

cloth.

Maintenance
Cleaning the safety
6-16 cover
Describes how to clean the safety cover.

Tool used: Lint free cloth, neutral detergent Time required: 5 minutes
●Rather than cleaning the safety cover once a month, clean it as needed.
1 Wipe the cover
inspection
Periodic
Periodic
●Be sure to use a damp cloth because a dried
cloth can scratch more easily even if it is soft.
Every
●If it is badly stained, wipe off with a soft cloth 560
hours
immersed in a neutral detergent diluted 200
times with water.
●Because the surface of the safety cover is

susceptible to damage, be careful neither to
scratch nor generate friction.
NOTICE
●Never use an undiluted neutral detergent such as alcohol, thinner or a cleaner (solvent).
(It causes cracks or significant reductions in anti-static effect.)

Maintenance
Inspecting the air drain
6-17 (regulator unit)
Describes how to inspect an air drain of the regulator unit.

Tool used: Lint free cloth, Allen wrench (2.5 mm) Time required: 10 minutes
Turn OFF the Remove the lower cover located on the rear
1 power and lock 2 of the machine to check for any water
the machine accumulated in the air drain
Loosen the bolt

4 (using an Allen
wrench)
Air drain
OFF
●Four locations
If water is accumulated in the air drain
3 Disconnect
the air hose
4 Drain the water out of the air drain
①Place a water-receiving bottle
(prepare on your own) under
the drain cock.
②Press the drain cock button to
drain water.
Drain cock
button
water-receiving bottle
NOTICE
Connect the
6 Close the cover 5 air hose
●No water should accumulate in
the air drain under the ●Wipe off any excess
environmental conditions Tighten the bolt moisture with a lint free cloth.
specified by us. (using an Allen
wrench)
●For machines operated under
environmental conditions other ●Four
than those specified by us, locations
periodically check the air drain
and drain water from it, if any.

Maintenance Cleaning the light-emitting
6-18 and light-receiving sections
(height sensor: option)
Describes cleaning of the light-emitting and light-receiving sections of the height sensor (option).
Tool used: Lint free cloth, Time required: 5 minutes per location
Detach the
1 2 3
inspection
feeder cart
Periodic
Periodic
(→P.3-2)
SERVO
OFF Every
560
hours
Cleaning the light-emitting and

5 4
3 light-receiving sections
Light-emitting and light-receiving
sections
(Picture seem from below)

●Wipe off with a soft lint free
cloth. (If this part gets
scratched, the height sensor
may not function properly)
Attach the
6 7 feeder cart
(→ P.3-2)

Maintenance
Greasing the
6-19 dispensing head (option) 1
Describes how to grease to the ball screw and the linear guide on the dispensing head.
Tool used: Grease gun, lint free cloth, gloves Time required: 30 minutes (per location)
Ball screw greasing point
Linear guide greasing point
●A part of the model is omitted for explanations.
WARNING
motor

●Remove the syringe part before work. (→P.4-2-5)
Detach the
1 2 feeder cart 3
inspection
Periodic
Periodic
(→P.3-2) SERVO
ENABLING OFF
Every
560
hours
Wipe away old Detach the

6 grease 5 feeder table 4
cover
(→P.3-3)
●Wipe away old grease off
the ball screw and linear
guide using a clean lint
free cloth.
Apply grease from Apply grease from the grease nipple of the
7 the grease nipple of 8 linear guide
the ball screw
●Apply grease each axis of
pos.1 and pos.2.
●Amount: 0.3 cm3 each.
●Grease: LCG100
To 9
Grease nipple
●Apply grease each axis of
pos.1 and pos.2.
●Amount: 0.3 cm3 each.
Grease nipple
●Grease: LCG100

Maintenance
Greasing the
6-19 dispensing head (option) 2
Attach the
9 feeder table 10 11
cover SERVO
(→P.3-3)
ON
20 19 18 Stop continuous
operation
SERVO
OFF STOP
21 Check
grease
excess
22 23
SERVO
●If any, wipe it off. ON

Attach the
12 feeder cart 13 Choose Z1-axis 14
inspection
Periodic
Periodic
(→ P.3-2)
ENABLING
Every
560
hours
●To spread the applied

grease, run a continuous
operation f at least five
times
17 16 Choose Z2-axis 15 Stop continuous

operation
ENABLING STOP
●To spread the applied

grease, run a continuous
operation f at least five
times

Maintenance Greasing the dummy
6-20 dispensing unit
Describes how to grease the linear guide and rack & pinion of the dummy dispensing unit.
Tool used: Lint free cloth, gloves Time required: 15 minutes (per location)
●or
Move the unit all Apply grease to the linear guide and the rack
7 the way several 6 & pinion
times by hands
to spread grease ●The linear guide used for the dummy dispensing unit has no oil
hole. Apply adequate amount of grease directly to the rail part of
the track rail.
●Grease: LCG100
Check excess Attach the

8 grease 9 dummy 10
dispensing unit
●Wipe any excess grease 1
off
2
①Tilt the attachment lever to

the left
②Attach the dummy
dispensing unit

1 2 3
inspection
Periodic
Periodic
SERVO
ENABLING OFF
Every
560
hours

exchange position.
Wipe away old grease off the linear guide and Detach the
5 the rack & pinion with a clean lint free cloth 4 dummy
dispensing unit
1
2
Linear guide
Rack & pinion ①Tilt the attachment lever to

the left
② Detach the dummy
dispensing unit
11
SERVO
ON

Maintenance Cleaning the nozzle (option) and
6-21 support pins 1
Describes how to clean the support pin nozzle and nozzle changer for support pins.
Name and role of support pin nozzle
A
C Nozzle tip (nozzle section)
This is the part to directly contact with
the flange of the support pin, and it
E picks support pins up.
(Contamination on the vacuum hole can
cause an pickup error)
●A vacuum pad is installed for stable
B pickup.
D D Nozzle inside
(Foreign objects adhering inside the
nozzle hinders the pickup and
C arrangement of support pins, and
various detection functions using
A
vacuum pressure.
This is the part to be chucked by the
nozzle holder of the placement head.
(Contamination on the taper surface and E Nozzle flange upper surface
The nozzle type and serial No. are shown
chucking groove may cause an air leak
by the 2D code. The 2D code area is
and faulty chucking)
recognized by the head camera.
Nozzle reflector (Leaving this part dirty or scratched
B Unlike the nozzle reflector for component

placement, this is the same material as
results in a recognition error.)
flange. This part checks whether the The cleaning method is the same as a
nozzle is properly placed or not by nozzle for component pickup.
reflecting the LED light from the multi- (→P.6-5)
recognition camera. (Ultrasonic cleaning system is not necessary
(Leaving this part dirty results in a for cleaning)
recognition error.)
Nozzle changer for support pin

This is the unit that is used to stock support pin
nozzles. When support pins are automatically
changed upon changeover, the placement head
automatically changes nozzles.
Nozzle changer upper cover

●When nozzles are manually inserted or removed,
turn the nozzle flange in a counterclockwise
direction until it does not get stuck with the upper
cover and remove upward.
Nozzle changer upper surface

(Any contamination of the nozzle changer upper surface allows
contaminants to adhere to the nozzle reflector, resulting in recognition
error.)

Precaution when the nozzle vacuum pad for support pins is replaced
If the vacuum pad is not inserted all the way, it may reduce the accuracy of the support pin arrangement
position, resulting in support pin replacement error. When the vacuum pad is replaced, make sure to check
the insertion condition of the vacuum pad. Install the vacuum pad as shown below so that there is no gap.
inspection
Periodic
Periodic
Every
560
hours
Gap
The insertion condition of the vacuum pad can be checked from the vacuum side. Make sure to check if the
vacuum pad is installed all the way to the end of the metal flange.
■When the vacuum pad is installed correctly

Vacuum pad
Metal flange Arrow A
■When the vacuum pad is not installed all the way

Vacuum pad
Metal flange

Maintenance Cleaning the nozzle (option) and
6-21 support pins 2
Cleaning the nozzle changer for support pin

Tool used: Lint free cloth, swabs
Time required : 5 minutes
1 Detach the feeder

cart 2 3
(→P.3-2)
SERVO
OFF
Attach the Place the support pin nozzle back as its

8 feeder table 7 original position
cover
(→P.3-3)
Attach the
9 10 11 feeder cart
(→P.3-2)
SERVO
ON

Detach the
4 5 Remove the support pin nozzle
inspection
feeder table
Periodic
Periodic
cover
(→P.3-3)
Every
560
hours
Lint free cloth

6 Wipe the nozzle changer upper surface
●Do not leave behind any contamination on the face

in contact with the nozzle flange.
●Wipe the inside with a swab and wipe the surface

with a lint free cloth.
●Confirm that there are no foreign objects jammed

inside the opening between the nozzle changer
upper cover and its upper surface.
Nozzle changer

Every-3000-hours
Maintenance
Cleaning the filter
7-1 (main controller)
Tool used: Allen wrench and vacuum cleaner Time required: 10 minutes
Turn OFF the Detach the

1
Detach the
feeder cart 2 power and lock 3 feeder table
(→P.3-2) the machine cover
(→P.3-3)
OFF
(Front side)
Remove dust
7 Attach the filter 6 attached to
the filter
●Put the filter between the springs.
Filter Spring Handle
●Hold the handle of the spring and
push it all the way into until the
projection A is hooked.
●Remove the filter, and clear

dust from the filter with a
vacuum cleaner.
Attach the cover Attach the

8 9 feeder table
●four crews ● Eight screws cover
(→P.3-3)

4 Remove the cover ● Eight screws ●four crews
inspection
Periodic
Periodic
Every
3000
hours
(Front side)
5 Remove the filter
Handle
●Hold the handles of the

filter holder at the upper
right of the main controller,
and pull it out.
Main controller
10 Unlock the
machine and 11 Attach the
feeder cart
(→P.3-2)
ON

Maintenance
Cleaning the filter
7-2 (power unit1)
Tool used: Allen wrench and vacuum cleaner Time required: 10 minutes
Turn OFF the Detach the

1
Detach the
feeder cart 2 power and lock 3 feeder table
(→P.3-2) the machine cover
(→P.3-3)
OFF
(Front side)
Remove dust
7 Attach the filter 6 attached to
the filter
●Put the filter between the springs.
Filter Spring Handle
●Hold the handle of the spring and
push it all the way into until the
projection A is hooked.
Power unit 1 Power cooling fan

●Remove the filter, and clear
dust from the filter with a
vacuum cleaner.
Attach the
8 Attach the cover
9 feeder table
●four crews ● Eight screws cover
(→P.3-3)

4 Remove the cover ● Eight screws ●four crews
inspection
Periodic
Periodic
Every
3000
hours
(Front side)
5 Remove the filter
Handle
●Hold the handle located at

the right side of the power
unit 1 power cooling fan and
pull it toward you.
Power unit 1 Power cooling fan
10 Unlock the
machine and 11 Attach the
feeder cart
(→P.3-2)
ON

Maintenance Cleaning the air filter
7-3 of the FA computer 1
(inspection box: option)
Describes how to clean the filter set on the FA computer of the inspection box.
Tool used: Allen wrench, vacuum cleaner Time required: 15 minutes
1 Shut down the

inspection box
2
OFF
Open the lower

7 Remove the cover 6 left door on the
●Pull the left side of the cover front
while pushing the claw in the
upper part of the inside of the
door to the right.
●Be aware that if you do so by
force, the claw will be
damaged.
Claw Door
Remove the
●Left cover removed
8 cover from the
FA computer
●When the left side of the
cover is detached, slide it
to the left to disengage its
right claws, and remove it
from the FA computer
main body.

Remove the front
3 Confirm that the UPS has stopped 4 cover of the
inspection
Periodic
Periodic
●Confirm that the UPS of the FA inspection box
computer in the inspection box Front cover
has stopped.
●Confirm that the power lamp of Every
3000
the FA computer turns off. hours
Even if it is turned ON, in about
one minutes after the power
supply switch of the machine is
turned OFF, the UPS stops and
the power lamp goes out.
Power lamp
Fixing screw
●Open the front cover of

5 Remove the cover of the FA computer the inspection box with
an Allen wrench.
●The cover is secured with six ●The front cover is
claws (inside the cover) on the secured with eight
right and the left side. screws.
9 Remove a filter 10 Clean the filter

●Remove the joints (at
dashed circles) of filter ●Remove dust with a
holder from the four fan- vacuum cleaner.
installation grooves, and
remove the filter holder.
●Remove the filter held by
To 11
the filter holder.
Filter holder

Maintenance Cleaning the air filter
7-3 of the FA computer 2
(inspection box: option)
11 Attach the filter
●Attach the filter to the filter

holder, insert the joints into
the four fan-installation
grooves, and attach the
filter holder.
Filter holder
12 Attach the cover of the FA computer

●Align the three right claws of the cover with the
appropriate positions on the case, align the three
left claws in the same way, and finally press in the
entire cover.
Attach the front

13 cover of the 14
inspection box ON
●Attach the front cover of
the inspection BOX with
an Allen wrench.
●Secure the front cover
with eight screws.

inspection
Periodic
Periodic
Every
3000
hours

Maintenance
Replacing the O-ring 1
7-4 (dispensing head: option)
Describes how to replace the O-ring.

●Even if the consumable parts replacement cycle has not ended, be sure to replace the O-ring if it is
cracked or deteriorated.
●Total four O-rings are used for these sections; one for a syringe holder section, one for a joint section and
two for a screw unit section.
Joint
O-ring
Screw unit Syringe holder
WARNING
motor

Syringe holder 1
● The explanation in the following procedure is an example when the dispensing head is installed on the
rear side and operated from the front side.
●Please remove the syringe before work.(→P.4-2-5)
inspection
Periodic
Periodic
1 2 3 Every
3000
hours
SERVO
ENABLING OFF

exchange position.
Replace the O- Remove the Remove four

6 ring 5 syringe holder 4 screws fixing the
cover
Cover
O-ring
Syringe holder Screw
To 7

Maintenance
Syringe holder 2
Put the syringe Tighten up four

7 holder back 8 screws to fix the 9
cover
Cover
Screw
10
SERVO
ON

Joint
Remove a joint Remove the O- Wipe adhesive

1 2 3 away
inspection
from the syringe ring
Periodic
Periodic
Joint ●If adhesives are attached,
2
an air may leaks and it
leads to dispensing Every
defect. 3000
Wipe off excess around hours
O-ring with a lint-free
1 cloth damped with solvent
(alcohol) if it sticks.
①Turn the joint.
②Pull it out. O-ring
4 Put a new O-ring

Maintenance
Screw unit
1 Disassemble the screw unit
Propeller ●Loosen screws to disassemble the propeller.

O-ring
●If it is difficult to remove the
propeller, hold the center of the
screw shaft with the pliers and
disassemble it.
●There is no problem if the center
Screw of the screw shaft is scathed.
Lower cap
Upper cap
●Turn the upper cap in a clockwise

direction to loosen.

Remove the O- Wipe adhesive
2 3 away 4 Put a new O-ring
inspection
ring
Periodic
Periodic
●If adhesives are attached,
an air may leaks and it
leads to dispensing Every
defect. 3000
Wipe off excess around hours
O-ring with a lint-free
cloth damped with solvent
(alcohol) if it sticks.
5 Put the screw unit back together again
●To assemble the propeller, after the markings

are aligned, tighten the screws.
Marking Be careful not to leave any clearance .

Maintenance
Replacing the collar
7-5 (dispensing head : option)
Describes how to replace the collar.

●Be sure to replace it at the consumable parts replacement cycle.
●Detach the screw unit from the machine before work.(→P.4-2-5)
Replacing the lower collar
Loosen the top cab (turn in a clockwise Replace the

1 direction), and detach the screw shaft and 2 lower collar
Lower collar from the screw unit
●There is no difference
Lower collar between front and rear
sides.
Upper cap
Put the screw

3 unit back
together again

Replacing the upper collar
1 Loosen the screws to detach the propeller
inspection
Periodic
Periodic
●If it is difficult to remove the ●There is no problem if the center
Propeller propeller, hold the center of the of the screw shaft is scathed.
Every
disassemble it. 3000
hours
Upper cap
Screws
Replace the two Draw out the Loosen the upper

4 upper collars 3 screw shaft 2 cap to detach it
about 10mm of (turn in a
Upper collars the screw unit clockwise
direction)
Upper cap
●There is no difference
between front and rear
sides.
●Tighten the upper cap (turn in a

counterclockwise direction), fix the screw shaft,
and attach the propeller.
●When the markings are aligned, tighten the
screws.

Maintenance Adjusting white
7-6 balance
(2D inspection head: Option)
This adjustment is performed for an inspection head.

The inspection head judges an inspection result by using colors and brightness of images captured by the
color camera.
Adjustment of white balance is a function to calibrate the camera to the normal condition so that the
inspection head can perform inspection correctly.
The calibration board and user master board are used for adjusting white balance. On the machine side,
colors and brightness of the camera is calibrated by using the calibration board. Because colors and
brightness of the calibration board itself change due to such as dust on the surface or deterioration with age,
it can also be calibrated by the user master board.
Therefore, when you adjust white balance, a target value of the calibration board must be obtained as well.
This operation is performed only on the inspection head.
●Detailed information and procedure for adjustment (→P.12-12 ‘White balance (2D inspection head)’)

Every-6000-hours
Maintenance
Inspecting the
8-1 backlight (touchscreen)
Tool used: None Time required : 1 minutes

●Confirm whether to view the touchscreen clearly.
●Please contact us for component replacement.
Touchscreen

Maintenance
Applying grease to the
8-2 hinge (touchscreen)

●Apply grease to the hinge at the back side of the touchscreen on the front and rear machine.
The touchscreen could be hard to move, apply grease regardless of maintenance period.
1 Tilt the touchscreen
inspection
Periodic
Periodic
forward
Front side
Every
6000
hours
2 Apply applicable amount of lubricant to the hinge
Hinge
*The following hydrocarbon lubricant

should be used.
No. Type Manufacturer

1 5-56 KURE Engineering Ltd.
Dispensing part 2 WD-40 WD-40 Company
N990PANA-028 Panasonic Factory
3
(TOUCH LUBE) Solutions Co., Ltd.
3 Spread the lubricant
Front side
●Move the touchscreen back

and forth several times.

Maintenance
Inspecting the 1006
8-3 nozzle (option)
Tool used: None Time required: 1 minute
●Confirm whether clamp grooves wear out or not.

(To prevent from decreasing clamping force after long time use)
●Replace it after 6000 hours (a year) or 700000 times of automatic nozzle changer of operation. It is
recommended that you stock spare nozzles.
Clamp groove

inspection
Periodic
Periodic
Every
6000
hours

Maintenance
Greasing the y-axis
8-4 sliding plate
Describes the method for greasing the Y-axis sliding plate.

Tool used: Grease gun, Time required: 5 minutes)
1
Detach the
feeder cart 2 3
(→P.3-2)
SERVO
OFF
WARNING
motor

4 Grease the Y-axis sliding plate from the grease
inspection
nipples.
Periodic
Periodic
Grease nipple for the Y-axis Every
sliding plate 6000
hours
●1/2 pumping (about 0.5 cm3)

●Grease to use: LCG100
Grease nipple position
Detach the
7 feeder cart 6 5
(→P.3-2) SERVO
ON

Every-18000-hours
Maintenance
Inspecting the nozzle
9-1 holder (option)
Light weight16-/12-/8-nozzle head

Tool used: None
Time required: 20 minutes for light weight16-nozzle head, 15 minutes for 12-nozzle head and 10 minutes for
8-nozzle head (per head)
●If any part wears out, it may cause pickup error or placement error. So , please inspect them after using
about 18000 hours. If any part wears out, replace it. We recommend replacing all parts at the same time.
1 Remove the spring for nozzle cushion

2 Pull out the
clamp claws
■For 12-/8-nozzle head ■For light weight16-nozzle
Twist the spring to remove. head
(Do not remove)
Spring for Clamp claws

nozzle
cushion
Attach the spring Check the part,

5 for holding 4 and if any 3 Remove the
spring for holding
clamp claws damage or wear clamp claws
out is found,
replace it
■When there is no
damage or wear out
Spring for
●Clean it and apply
holding
Spring for grease (→P.5-2)
clamp claws
holding
clamp claws
Push in the
6 clamp claw 7 Attach the spring for nozzle cushion
(For 12-/8-nozzle head)
Groove in
nozzle
holder
●Check that the claws are

securely engaged in the
grooves in the nozzle
holder.

2-nozzle head
Tool used: None Time required: 10 minutes per head
● When you perform maintenance while the head is attached to the machine, observe the followings.
・Be careful not to fall parts.
・Prepare the plate in the case of falling the components.
inspection
Lightly pull the Remove the
Periodic
Pull the clamp
1 spring for holding 2 claws 3 spring for holding
clamp claws clamp claws
Every
18000
hours
Clamp
claws
Spring for holding

clamp claws
Push in the Attach the spring Check the part,

6 clamp claw 5 for holding clamp 4 and if any
claws damage or wear
out is found,
replace it
■When there is no
A damage or wear
●Clean it and apply
grease. (→P.5-3)
A Detail Groove of the

nozzle holder
Nozzle Spring for

holder holding
clamp claws
●Check that the claws are

securely engaged in the
grooves in the nozzle
holder.

Maintenance
Inspecting the cable
9-2 bearer (XY unit)
●If the cable bearer is exhausted, the operating sound will become loud and it will cause breakage to wire
and tube. Inspect them after using about 18000 hours. If any part wears out, replace it.
● To replace the parts, contact us.
X-axis cable bearer
Y-axis cable bearer

Maintenance
Replacing the spring 1
Tool used: Allen wrench Time required:10 minutes

●Detach the screw unit from the machine before work.(→P.4-2-5)
1 Loosen setscrews of the screw unit and detach the propeller
inspection
Periodic
●If it is difficult to remove the ●There is no problem if the center
Propeller propeller, hold the center of the of the screw shaft is scathed.
Every
disassemble it. 18000
hours
Upper cap
Setscrews
Loosen the upper Draw out the Replace the

2 cap to detach it 3 screw shaft 4 spring
(turn in a clockwise about 10mm of
direction) the screw unit
Spring
Upper cap
●These two collars are the

same. There is no
difference between front
and rear sides.
●Tighten the upper cap (turn in a

counterclockwise direction), fix the screw
shaft, and attach the propeller.
Upper cap ●When the markings are aligned, tighten
the screws.

Maintenance
Tool used: Spanner Time required: 15 minutes

● Detach the syringe from the machine before work.(→P.4-2-5)
●The explanation in the following procedure is an example when the dispensing head is installed on the rear
side and operated from the front side.
1 2 3
SERVO
ENABLING OFF

exchange position.
WARNING

inspection
Periodic
Loosen the bolt fixing the spring and remove Replace the Every
4 it 5 spring
18000
hours
●Be careful not to lose the
spring.
Bolt
Spring
Screw unit holder
Replace the rest

8 7 6 of springs as
well
SERVO
● Turn the screw unit
ON holder and replace the
rest of spring as well.
●The bolt tightening torque
is 0.3 N･m.

Maintenance
Tool used: Spanner Time required: 10 minutes
1 2 3
SERVO
ENABLING OFF

exchange position.
12 11 10 Attach
dummy
the
SERVO dispensing unit

1
ON
2

the left
②Attach the dummy
dispensing unit

inspection
Periodic
Detach the Remove the Loosen and
4 dummy 5 stopper 6 remove the spring
Every
18000
hours
dispensing unit retaining bolt
1

the left
②Detach the dummy
dispensing unit
Attach the Attach the spring Replace the

9 stopper 8 retaining bolt 7 spring
Spring

Maintenance Replacing the
9-4 heater/thermocouple
●If the heater is deteriorated, the nozzle temperature cannot be controlled, causing poor dispensing;
therefore, periodic replacement is recommended.
Because the heater and a thermocouple are modularized, also the thermocouple will be replaced together.
●Please contact us in the case of replacement.

10 Replacement
Maintenance
Head and nozzle
10-1 changer replacement 1
Tool used: Torque wrench (N510050388AA), long bit (Hex. opposite side of 5 mm, N510046662AA),
an Allen wrench.(2.5mm)
Time required: 10 minutes
●Please contact us for replacement of the inspection head.
Removing a head
Turn OFF the

1
Detach the
feeder cart 2 power and lock
3
(→P.3-2) the machine
OFF
4 Remove the connector
Head stopper
Ensure that ●Push and lean the upper part of the head
the connector to the rear to work.
section is ●The head-stopper sections (one each on
disconnected the right and the left) prevent the head
from dropping into the machine.
■Weight of heads
5 Remove the head Type Weight
●Hold the handle in the upper art Light weight 16-nozzle 6.3 kg
of the head, and detach the head
head with paying attention not to 12-nozzle head 7.6 kg
let it interfere with the cover.
●Store the detached heads on the 8-nozzle head 8.3 kg
head stand.
3-nozzle head 8.6 kg
Dispensing head 7.5 kg
Attachment
1.5 kg
without head

3 Loosen the head fixing bolts
●For the upper-right bolt, if the mounting surface is in close contact, all the screw parts cannot be
pulled out. Slide the head unit to the rear, and ensure that the screw parts of the bolt are
Replacement
completely pulled out.
●Loosen the fixing bolts (4 locations) in the order of 1 through 4 .
4 Upper left of head
3 Upper right of head
2 Lower left of head
1 Lower right of head
NOTICE
●Head storing box
For the head replacement work, prepare a workbench
Model No.:N610128856AA
(0.9 m to1.2 m in height) on your own.
●Head stand (option)
Model No.:N610124224AA
*The removed head should be kept in the head stand
or the head storing box.
CAUTION
Be careful of handling a head when it carries
(Risk of injury due to drop/Risk of back pain)

Maintenance
Head and nozzle
Time required:10 minutes (Time taking to install a head)
Attaching a head
Turn OFF the

1 power and lock 2
the machine
OFF
5 Tighten the head with fixing bolts

●Tighten the fixing bolts (4 locations) in the order of 1 through 4 with torque wrench
and a long bit.
● Prescribed tightening torque :9.8 ±0.5 N·m
Long bit
Torque wrench
4 Upper left of head
3 Upper right of head
2 Lower left of head
1 Lower right of head

Head plate
3 Install the head
Head stopper
●Hold the handle in the upper part of the head, and hook the head X-axis plate
stopper to X-axis plate with paying attention not to let it interfere with
the cover.
●Confirm the installation surface for any foreign objects beforehand.
Replacement
●Head stopper: (one
each on right and left)
Lateral lighting
4 Pull the head to the front to insert the

connector section
Connector
Multi-recognition camera unit

NOTICE
When the BGA or CSP is attached
with the 8-nozzle head or 3-nozzle
head, make sure that the multi-
recognition camera unit has a
lateral lighting attached to it.
Replace the Unlock the

6 nozzle changer 7 8 machine and
●Use a nozzle changer that ON

matches the attached head.
●For the dispensing head,
attach the dummy
dispensing unit.

Maintenance
Head and nozzle
Calibration
After replacing the head, it is necessary to perform calibration and accuracy verification.
STEP Item Action Reference
Height measurement →P.12-1-2, 12-4

Head/Placement
STEP2 Dummy dispensing unit
Correction Z →P.12-1-2, 12-4
height *1)
Scan position *2) →P.12-1-2, 12-10

Jig station
Head offset *2) →P.12-1-2, 12-10
STEP3
Dispensing head Head θ-axis origin →P. 12-1-2, 12-11
(option) *1) Head offset →P. 12-1-2, 12-11
Accuracy Placement accuracy Reflection →P.12-1-2, 12-19

verification *3) Placement accuracy verification →P.12-1-2, 12-19
*1) To be performed only for the machines with that option

*2) It is not carried out for the dispensing head.
*3) Reflection (optional) and verification (optional) of dispensing head accuracy are carried out for the
dispensing head.

Old type head
The old type head is fixed with three bolts. (For the current head, use four bolts to fix.)
For details of the difference of the current head and old type head, see below.
When the old type head is attached on NPM-D3, you need to remove the unused fixing bolts.
For details, see the subsequent pages.
■For current head
Replacement
Screw hole which locates the
lower left part viewed from the
head attachment face
Screw hole
■For old type head
No hole or circular hole

which locates the lower
left part viewed from the
head attachment face
No hole
Circular hole

Maintenance
Head and nozzle
When the old type head is attached to NPM-D3, remove the unused fixing bolts before performing step 3 in
“Attaching a head” (→P.10-1-3) and fix the removed bolts to the storage place in the machine. The
operations are described here.
Tool used: Allen wrench (5mm and 2.5mm) Time required: 3 minutes
Attaching the old type head (Removing fixing bolts)
Move the head to the position where you can see the bolt
1 (Align the center of the head to the one of the multi-recognition camera)
Lower left of a head
2 Remove a fixing bolt Fixing bolt
●Remove the upper bolt. ●Remove the lower fixing ●Put the upper bolt to the
bolt. original position.
3 Fix the removed fixing bolts to the storage position
Fixing bolt

■When the old type head is removed and the current head is attached
●You need to carry out the operation that the fixing bolts are removed from the storage position and
put them back to the original position. After the old type head is removed, put the fixing bolts back
to the original position in the reverse order by referring to the operation to remove the fixing bolts
described in the previous page.
Replacement

Maintenance
Mode Switching to the single
10-2-1 switch lane mode
Switching the mode allows you to use the machine either for single conveyor or dual conveyor.
●Follow the procedure below for switching. In this case, we explain to switch from dual conveyor to single
conveyor. Take the same procedure for switching from single lane mode to dual lane mode.
1
(The message of removing
the support pin unit is displayed)
Confirm the message

2 +
3 Confirm the message
+
(The PCB-support block goes up so
2 that you can remove now)
4 Detach the feeder cart

(→P.3-2)
5 Servo switch OFF
6 Open the safety cover
7 Detach the feeder table cover

(→P.3-3)
Cover the multi-recognition

3
8 camera with a cloth
●It will keep foreign bodies from entering
the camera lens during the work.
9 Remove the PCB-support plate

●Be careful not to drop foreign bodies on
the multi-recognition camera (LED
lighting) or bump it.
10 Remove the cloth with which

the multi-recognition camera
was covered
NPM-D3 10-2-1-1 EJM6DE-MB-10M-01

15
11 Attach the feeder table cover

(→P.3-3)
12 Close the safety cover
13 Servo switch ON
Replacement
(→P.3-2)
16
15 +
+
(The PCB-support block goes down)
17
(Returns to the lane switch screen)
17
18
18 +
(The message whether or not to shut
down the power is displayed)
19 Turn OFF the main

power switch
OFF
NPM-D3 10-2-1-2 EJM6DE-MB-10M-01

Maintenance
Mode
Confirming switch
10-2-2 switch
Describes how to confirm the switch on the single conveyor after changing the mode.
3 1 5
1 +
2
3 +
4
2
5
4 6 Confirm the message
6 7 Confirm the message
+
(The PCB-support block goes up so
that you can attach it now)

(→P.3-2)
9 Servo switch OFF
7
(→P.3-3)
NPM-D3 10-2-2-1 EJM6DE-MB-10M-01

12 Cover the multi-recognition
camera with a cloth
●It will keep foreign bodies from entering
the camera lens during the work.
13 Attach the PCB-support plate

●Be careful not to drop foreign bodies on
19 the multi-recognition camera (LED
lighting) or bump it.
14 Remove the cloth with which
Replacement
the multi-recognition camera
was covered
15 Attach the feeder table cover
(→P.3-3)
17 Servo switch ON
20

(→P.3-2)
19 +
+
(The PCB-support block goes down
until origin)
21
21
22
22
(Returns to the lane switch screen)
NPM-D3 10-2-2-2 EJM6DE-MB-10M-01

Maintenance
Attachment without
10-3 head
This is a function used when a head is attached to single axis on the machine or no head is attached on both
sides and a PCB being transported passes through. For how to install the attachment without head, see Head
and nozzle changer replacement (→P.10-1)
■Machine conditions when this function is used

Install the attachment without head to the
1 axis which does not install the head
●Machine will not operate unless installed.
Attachment
without head
2 Install a feeder cart
●Machine will not operate unless installed.
REFERENCE
The safety cover (option) can be used instead of a
feeder cart.
Feeder cart
3 Power ON
●Make sure that the screen on the right appears

after turning ON the power.
(The screen indicates for the front head.)

Maintenance
Feeder cart switch unit
10-4 1
This section describes how to switch the tray feeder to the feeder cart. If you switch from the feeder cart to
the tray feeder, switch in the reverse order.
Tape/Tray Support
Replacement
1
No. Unit name Function Quantity

This is a unit that locks/unlocks the feeder cart when
attached/detached to/from the machine.
1 Feeder cart switch unit drive It should be detached from the machine when the tray 1
feeder is connected.
Mass: 20kg
This is used as an auxiliary unit when
attaching/detaching the feeder cart switch unit drive
to/from the machine. It is also used as a storage table
2 Switching cart for the feeder cart switch unit drive and the drawer 1
connector extension unit when the tray feeder is
connected.
Mass: 10kg
This is a drawer connector extension unit to be used

Drawer connector extension because the feeder cart position of the tray-feeder-type
3 1
unit machine shifts toward the operator.
Mass: 4kg

Maintenance
10-4 2
Switching from the tray feeder to the feeder cart type 1
1 Detach the tray feeder
2 Remove the feeder-table

cover
●Move the switching cart near the
installation position of the feeder cart
switch unit drive.
Lock the two stoppers of

3 the switching cart
●For the sake of safety, be sure to lock
the stoppers.
Switching cart stopper
Attach the feeder cart
4 switch unit drive
●Hold the handles of the feeder cart
switch unit drive, lift it up from the
switching cart, and set the end of the
feeder cart switch unit drive to the
front positioning pin .
A
Align the front positioning pin
5 and the positioning groove
with each other
A ●Turn the feeder cart switch unit drive
Feeder cart switch unit clockwise, and align the front
B
drive end positioning pin B and the
Positioning groove in the positioning groove in the feeder cart
feeder cart switch unit
switch unit drive with each other.
drive
6 Unlock the stoppers of the

switching cart
●Depressing the pedal unlocks the
stopper.
Unlock pedal for the switching cart
stopper

7 Move the switching cart from
inside the machine
Replacement
Secure the feeder cart
8 switch unit drive
●Tighten the bolts with an Allen wrench.
(three locations)
Standard value of tightening torque:
40±4 N·m
Wiring ( 1)
Secure the wiring and

9 tubing
Tubing ( 1)

Maintenance
10-4 3
Switching from the tray feeder to the feeder cart type 2
Set the drawer connector

11 extension unit aligning it with
the positioning pins of the
drawer connector
Front positioning
pin
12 Attach the drawer connector

extension unit
●Tighten the bolts with an Allen

wrench.

11 Consumable parts
replacement
Maintenance Replacing the transfer belt
11-1 of the PCB transfer conveyor
1
Describes the procedure for replacing the transfer belt of the PCB transfer conveyor system on the front of the
machine.
Tool used: Allen wrench (2 mm) Time required: 30 to 60 minutes
Detach the
1 Set the
conveyor width
2 feeder cart 3 Turn OFF the
power and lock
to 150 mm (→P.3-2) the machine
(To improve
workability)
(→[ Operating 4
Procedure] P. 2-5-4)
OFF
Front side
9 Hook a new belt 8 Remove the belt
Ex.) Lane 1: Fixed side (short specification)

① ② ③
●Remove it, pulling out
towards you.
●If disposing of the belt,
you may cut it with a wire
cutter or nippers to
remove.
No. Length of belt [mm]
①、③ 990
② 1566
●Configuration of belt length is common to each lane and each

specification.
●Referring to the belt installation drawing of each lane (→P.6-6),
hook a belt to each pulley.
●About the front and rear sides of the belt
Front side: No letter printed
Rear side: Letters are printed
●Install the belt so the belt front side shall be the PCB transfer
side.

Detach the
4 5 Push the X-axis
inward 6 feeder table
cover
(→P.3-3)
Consumable parts
replacement
7 Loosen screws on the plate and slide the plate
■Long specification ■Short specification
Plate2 Plate1
●Plate 1 only
●Bolt plate 1: Four locations ●Do not remove the

Plate 2: Two locations plate.
Adjust the belt

10 Secure the plate 11 tension
■Long specification (→ P.6-6)
■Short specificatio
Plate2 Plate1
●Plate 1 only
To 12
●Bolt plate 1: Four locations

Plate 2: Two locations

Maintenance Replacing the transfer belt
11-1 of the PCB transfer conveyor
2
12 Attach the
feeder table 13 14 Unlock the
machine and
cover
(→P.3-3)
ON
Attach the
15 feeder cart
(→P.3-3)
■About installation of the transfer belt

●Installation of the transfer belt for each specifications per lane is described in subsequent pages.
Copy or cut a necessary page and use it for belt replacement.

How to route the transfer belt
NPM-D3 搬送皮带的配置方法
【Short specification】搬送ベルトの引き回し方法
■Short specification 短皮带规格ショート仕様
LANE 1 ( FIXED RAIL )

レーン1(固定レール)
LANE 1 ( MOVABLE RAIL )

レーン1(可動レール)
Consumable parts
replacement

・ Loosen the tension pulley (●) and replace the belt.

・请松缓(●)的张力轮后，进行皮带的更换的作业。
LANE 2 ・ (●)のテンションプーリーを緩めて、ベルト交換作業を行ってください。
MOVABL RAIL
LANE 1 (可動レール)
FIXED RAIL
(固定レール)

How to route the transfer belt
NPM-D3 搬送皮带的配置方法
【Long specification】搬送ベルトの引き回し方法
■Long specification 长皮带规格ロング仕様




・ Loosen the tension pulley (●) and replace the belt.

・请松缓(●)的张力轮后，进行皮带的更换的作业。
LANE 2 ・ (●)のテンションプーリーを緩めて、ベルト交換作業を行ってください。
MOVABL RAIL
LANE 1 (可動レール)
FIXED RAIL
(固定レール)

Consumable parts
replacement

Maintenance Replacing the PCB transfer
11-2 belt of the conveyor L , the
conveyor R (Option)
Describes the procedure for replacing the PCB transfer belt of the conveyor L, the conveyor R on the
front of the machine.
Tool used: Allen wrench (2 mm) Time required: 30 minutes
1 Set the conveyor

width to 150 mm
2 Turn OFF the
power and lock
3 Open the
conveyor top
(To improve the machine cover
workability)
(→[Operating 4
Procedure]
P. 2-5-4)
OFF
Unlock the Adjust the belt

8 machine and 7 Close the
conveyor top
6 tension
(→ P.6-6)
cover
ON

4 Remove the belt
●Remove it, pulling out

towards you.
●If disposing of the belt,
you may cut it with a wire
Consumable parts
replacement
cutter or nippers to
remove.
5 Hook a new belt
●Seeing the under figure, hook the belt on each

No. Length of belt [mm]
pulley.
●About the front and rear sides of the belt ① 1174.5
Front side: No letter printed
Rear side: Letters are printed
●Install the belt so the belt front side shall be the
PCB transfer side.
■Lane 1: Fixed side, Movable side ■Lane 2: Fixed side, Movable side
① ①

Maintenance
Replacing the batteries
11-3 1
Describes the procedure for replacing the batteries.

●If the battery voltage decreases, a warning message is displayed on the monitor, or the LED indicator lamp
goes out. Replace the batteries with new ones according to the procedure.
NOTICE
●Batteries are used for multiple parts including the control board of the machine. Used batteries should be
disposed of in compliance with the laws or regulations of each country, or contact your local government or
the service agency from which you purchased them.
●Mishandling the batteries could lead to an accidents including leakage, heat generation, explosion or
ignition, or malfunction of equipment. Be sure to observe the following.
・In case battery liquid gets into eyes, wash eyes with plenty of clean water such as tap water. Get
medical attention immediately.
・Do not charge the battery because it is primary cell.
・Do not short (+) and (-) of the battery, or do not insert in reverse.
・Do not throw into a fire, heat, disassemble or remodel the battery.
・Do not deform the battery or apply strong impact.
・Immediately remove the drained battery from the device.
●Because the control PCB may break due to static electricity, be careful of handling with using earth band.
●Avoid the control PCB Short-circuiting by putting it directly on the metal surface. It does not cause smoke
or ignition but it may decrease battery life after being replaced.

Battery locations and information
■Machine
When the voltage
No. Location Model No. (battery) Type (battery) Life
decreases
BR-2/3AC2P or its Warning message is
1 CPU board N510042756AA 10 years
equivalent displayed on the monitor
Warning message is
2 NCIO board N610156136AA ER6V-LY 10 years
displayed on the monitor
FA computer:
Warning message is
3 Calendar battery — — 10 years
(Conveyor L)
FA computer:
Warning message is
4 UPS battery N510048031AA FC-BP0011 6 years
Consumable parts
(Conveyor L)
replacement
The LED lamp of the power
5 Jig station - AA size battery 1 year
supply switch goes out
FA computer
Jig station
NCIO board CPU board

■Inspection box
When the voltage
No. Location Model No. (battery) Type (battery) Life
decreases
FA computer: Warning message is
1 — — 10 years
Calendar battery displayed on the monitor
FA computer: Warning message is
2 N510048031AA FC-BP0011 3 years
UPS battery displayed on the monitor
FA computer

Maintenance
11-3 2
Replacing the CPU board battery

Tool used: Allen wrench (opposite side 3 mm), Phillips screwdriver (No.2) Time required: 30 minutes
●Please replace the battery within two hours.
●Be careful not to cut the cable with the tip of the cooling fin.
Turn OFF the

1 power and lock
the machine
OFF
Connect the Attach the

7 battery 6 battery case
connector
Battery case
Connector
●Screws (2)
CPU board
8 Install the CPU board
Cable
Screws (2)
●Insert the board and pull up the
top and bottom levers inward to
set it.
●Connect the cable.
●Screw (4 pcs) tightening torque:
240 ±20 cN・m
Screws (2)

CPU board
2 Remove the CPU board
Cable
●Open the lower cover located on Screws (2)
the front side of the machine, and
remove the cables.
●Loosen the screws securing the
CPU board.
●Pull out the board while holding
down the red lock release buttons
Consumable parts
(PRESS) at the top and the bottom
replacement
of the board and moving the levers
down.
●Screws (4) Screws (2)
Replace the Remove the Disconnect the

5 battery with a 4 battery case 3 battery
new one connector
Battery case
Connector
●Use BR-2/3AC2P or
equivalent as a replacement
battery
●Pull the battery cable out of
the hole (↑ ). ●Screws (2)
Unlock the
9 machine and
ON

Maintenance
11-3 3
Replacing the NCIO board battery

Tool used: Allen wrench (opposite side 3 mm) , Phillips screwdriver Time required: 30 minutes
●Please replace the battery within two hours.
Turn OFF the

1 power and lock
the machine
OFF
Replace the
4 battery with a ●Use N610156136AA or ■Connection cross-section
new one equivalent as a replacement
Battery
battery.
●Secure the new battery to the
Tie wrap
board using two tie wraps
(2.5 mm or less in width, and
UL94V-0 rated (flameproof)
or equivalent).
●Connect the connector
Battery NCIO board
Install the NCIO board

5 NICO board
Cable
●Slide the board onto the guide
and pull up the top and bottom
levers inwards to set it.
●Connect the cable.
●Screw (2 pcs) tightening torque:
240 ±20 cN·m
Screws (2)

2 Remove the NCIO board NCIO board
Cable
●Open the lower cover located on the
front side of the machine, and remove
the cables.
●Loosen the screws securing the NCIO
board.
●Pull out the board while holding down
the red lock release buttons (PRESS)
Consumable parts
of the levers at the top and the bottom
replacement
of the board and moving the lever Screws (2)
down.
3 Remove the battery case

●Disconnect the battery
connector.
●Cut the tie wraps (2) to
remove the battery.
Connector Tie wraps
Unlock the
6 machine and
ON

Maintenance
11-3 4
Replacing the batteries for the jig station

Time required: 2 minutes
Turn OFF the Open the battery

1 power supply 2 box covers 3 Replace the
batteries with
switch new ones
■Front face ■Rear face
■Inside of the battery box
＋－＋－
Battery boxes
Power supply switch －＋－＋
●Replace all 8 AA size

Close the battery
4 box covers
batteries (4 batteries x 2
boxes)
■Rear face ●Be careful of the (+) and
(-) marks inside the
battery box when
replacing the batteries.
Battery boxes
5 Turn ON the power supply switch

●Ensure that the LED lamp for the
power supply switch illuminates.
■Front face
LED lamp

Replacing the calendar backup battery of the FA computer (Conveyor L)
●Replacement of the calendar backup battery requires BIOS setting which should be carried out by
personnel with specialized expertise. Contact our service representative.
Consumable parts
replacement
Replacing the UPS of the FA computer (Conveyor L)
●If a battery is used beyond its service life, the production information in the hard disk may be lost
or the hard disk may be damaged when power failure has occurred.
Remove the front cover of the

1 conveyor L
●Make sure the main power

switch of the conveyor L is
OFF, and detach the front
cover.
●Open the front cover of the
conveyor L with an Allen
wrench.
●Bolts(7)
Remove the cover of the FA

2 computer
Nail
●While pressing down the

nail in the center, pull
the upper part of the To 3
front cover toward you.
●The front cover is attached ●Pull it carefully because
the nail can be broken if
with its six nails at the top
you force it to open.
and bottom.

Maintenance
11-3 5
Disconnect the Remove the Replace the UPS

3 connector of the
4 UPS battery
5
UPS battery
Connector UPS compartment
●Use the N510048031AA

battery for replacement.
●Take out the battery from
the case, and disconnect
the connector to replace
Screws (2) the battery with a new one.
Install the front Connect the

8 cover 7 connector of the 6 Install the UPS
battery
UPS battery
Connector UPS compartment
●Fit three nails into the

bottom and then other
three nails into the top of
the front cover. After that,
push the whole cover to Screws (2)
install it.
Write the next replacement

10 Install the front cover of the
9 date of the UPS battery conveyor L
●Install the front

Replacement- cover of the LNB
timing label conveyor or the
conveyor L with
●Paste the label included with the battery, an Allen wrench.
and write the next replacement timing ●Bolts(7)
on it.
●The next date to replace the battery
should be six years from the current
replacement date.

Replacing the calendar backup battery of the FA computer in the
inspection box
●Replacement of the calendar backup battery requires BIOS setting which should be carried out
by personnel with specialized expertise. Contact our service representative.
Consumable parts
replacement
Replacing the UPS battery of the FA computer in the inspection box
●If a battery is used beyond its service life, the production information in the hard disk may be lost
or the hard disk may be damaged when power failure has occurred.
1 Shut down the

inspection box
2
OFF
3 Make sure that the UPS has stopped

●Make sure that the UPS of the FA computer in the inspection
box has stopped.
●Make sure that the power lamp on the FA computer is turned
OFF.
Even if it is turned ON, in about one minute after the power
supply switch of the machine is turned OFF, the UPS stops and
the power lamp goes out. To 4
Power lamp
NPM-D3 11-3-10 EJM6DE-MB-11M-01

Maintenance
11-3 6
Remove the
4 Remove the front cover of the inspection box
5 cover of the FA
Front cover ●Open the front cover of the computer
inspection BOX with an ●The cover is secured with
Allen wrench. six claws (inside the
The front cover is secured cover).
with eight screws.
11 Pull out the UPS battery

●Pull out t battery about 30 mm from inside the main body.
●Be careful not to draw it out too far because its internal cables
may be damaged. And also, take care not to pinch the cables.
12 Remove the UPS battery connector

Power cable (connector)
●Open the wire sticker holding the connectors.
●Draw out the power and signal cables that are connected with the
battery, and pull out the connectors while pushing their locks.
Wire sticker
Signal cable (connector)
NPM-D3 11-3-11 EJM6DE-MB-11M-01

Open the lower
6 left door on the 7 Remove the cover
front ●Pull the left side of
the cover while
pushing the claw in
the upper part of the
inside of the door.
●Pull it carefully
because the nail can
Door be broken if you
Consumable parts
replacement
force it to open.
Claw Left side of the cover removed
Remove the Remove the Remove the

10 UPS battery 9 UPS battery 8 cover from the
cover FA computer
●Remove the screws ●Remove the screws
fixing the battery. fixing the cover. main body
●When the left side of the
cover is detached,
slide it to the left to
disengage its right nails,
and remove it from the FA
computer main body.
13 Replace the UPS battery

●Pull out the battery.
●The replacement battery should be N510048031AA.
●Push the new battery into the FA computer main body (to the
position in step 11 , and connect the power and signal cable
connectors.
●The cables should be placed on the battery sheet metal in such a To 14
manner that the power and signal cables are located outside and
inside respectively.
●Holding the power and signal connectors with the wire sticker, push
UPS battery the battery into the FA computer main body.
●At this time, take care not to pinch the cables.
NPM-D3 11-3-12 EJM6DE-MB-11M-01

Maintenance
11-3 7
14 Secure
battery
the UPS
15 Attach the UPS battery cover
●Secure it with two ●Attach it with two screws.
screws. ●At this time, take care not to pinch
the cables that are connected with
the battery.
17 Attach the front

cover of the 16 Attach the FA computer cover
inspection box
● Fit three nails into
the right side and
● Attach the front cover of the other three
the inspection box with nails into the left
an Allen wrench. side of the cover.
●Secure the front cover After that, push
with eight screws. the whole cover to
install it.
18
ON
NPM-D3 11-3-13 EJM6DE-MB-11M-01

Consumable parts
replacement
NPM-D3 11-3-14 EJM6DE-MB-11M-01

Maintenance Replacing the dummy
11-4 dispensing tape
Tool used: None Time required:3分
1 2 3
SERVO
ENABLING OFF

exchange position.
Secure the edge

10 Attach two stoppers 9 of the dummy
dispensing tape
●Be sure to tighten up the to the paper core
stopper, otherwise of the take-up
the tape slips. side with tape
Stopper
Attach the
11 dummy 12 13
dispensing unit SERVO
1 ON

the left
②Attach the dummy dispensing
unit

Detach the Detach two Detach the old
4 dummy 5 stoppers 6 tape
dispensing unit
●Keep a paper core of a
1 feed side and do not
throw it away. It is used
2
for rolling up a new tape.
Tape-up side
Consumable parts
replacement
the left
②Detach the dummy Stoppers
Feed side
dispensing unit
Put the paper

8 Put a new tape to a feed side 7 core of an old
●Dummy dispensing tape:
tape to take-up
N210112529AA side
●Attention to the rotation
direction of a dummy
dispensing tape
Tape-up side
Feed side

Maintenance Replacing the cushion
11-5 (wiping station)
Tool used: None Time required: 1minute

●When the cushion (wiping station) is broken or seriously contaminated, replace it according to the following
steps.

inward
SERVO
OFF
Put the cushion Replace the old Remove the

6 (wiping station) 5 cushion (wiping 4 cushion (wiping
back to the station) to new station)
original position one
●Make sure that the

●Cushion (wiping station):
cushion (wiping station) is
properly placed. If it is N610116409AA
mounted on the frame
and placed, it may
damage a nozzle during
operation.
7 8
SERVO
ON

Consumable parts
replacement

Maintenance Replacing the air filter
element of the placement
11-6 head (Light weight 16-nozzle) 1
Describes how to replace an air filter element of the placement head (light weight 16-nozzle).
Tool used: None Time required: 15 minutes (per head) Life time (reference): 6000 [h]
1 2 Detach the feeder

cart (→P.3-2)
3
ENABLING SERVO
OFF
Press the lever Replace the air filter element

9 and insert the 8 ●Air filter element product
joint with the air No.: N510059928AA
filter element Joint O-ring ●O-ring product
No.: N510059867AA
●Be careful of handling an air
filter element when replacing
it.(→P.11-6-3)
●Check if the O-ring is not

Air filter element
deteriorated.
If it is deteriorated, replace it
with a new one.
10 Attach the
feeder table 11
1 cover
2
(→P.3-3)
Lever Joint
●16 locations
●Be careful not to drop the
air filter element.
●Do not hold the head
camera and perform
maintenance.

Remove the Press the lever
4 5 feeder table 6 and pull out the
cover joint with the air
(→ P.3-3)
filter element
Consumable parts
replacement
7 Clean inside the filter using a swab
●Do not use an air blow gun 1
2
Lever Joint
●16 locations
Swab
●Be careful not to drop the
air filter element.
●Do not hold the head
camera and perform
maintenance.
Attach the
12 13 feeder cart
SERVO (→P.3-2)
ON

11-6 head (Light weight 16-nozzle) 2
Precaution of handling an air filter element

When handling an air filter element, check the followings and use if properly.
The illustration for the light weight 16-nozzle head is used here as an example; however, the same procedure
is also applicable to an air filter element for 16-, 12-, 8-, 2- 3-nozzle head.
■Handling of an air filter

●Hold a new air filter element as shown ●Do not hold the air filter element vertically.
below and install it to the joint (cap). Otherwise it might be deformed, affecting
performance of the filter.
■Installing of an air filter

●Do not reuse a used air filter element. It may cause product damage or malfunction.
●If you ever install a new air filter element to the joint (cap), it will be considered as a used one. Therefore, do
not use it again.
●Be sure to install the air filter element all the way until it hits to the end surface of the joint (cap). Be careful
not to break the element during installation.
Air filter element
Because the outer shape of the joint (cap) installation portion is larger than
the inner diameter of the air filter element, 1 to 2mm area from the end
surface is risen. However, it does not affect product performance.
Joint (cap)

Consumable parts
replacement

11-7 head (12-nozzle)
Describes how to replace an air filter element of the placement head (12-nozzle).
Tool used: Torque wrench (N510050388AA), Long type bit (Hex. side 5 mm , N510046662AA ),
Allen wrench (2.5 mm), Allen wrench (2 mm), Spanner ( 7 mm)
Time required: 135 minutes (per head) Life time (reference): 6000 [h]
1 Detach the head

(→P.10-1)
2 Remove the bracket
Tool used: Allen wrench (2.5 mm)
●Four screws
Two on the front
Two on the rear
Assemble the Replace the air filter element

8 filter 7
Tool used:
Spanner (7 mm) O-ring
●Air filter element product
Allen wrench (2 mm)
No. : N510068213AA
●O-ring product
No.: N510059865AA
●Check if the O-ring is not

deteriorated.
If it is deteriorated, replace it with a
Air filter element new one.
9 Attach the filter

10 Attach the connectors and tubes
Connector
Tool used: Spanner (7 mm) ●12 locations for each
●12 locations
Tube
Filter

Remove connectors and tubes Remove the filter
3 ●12 locations
4
for each Connector Tool used: Spanner (7 mm)
●12 locations
Consumable parts
replacement
Tube
Filter
6 Clean inside the

filter using a
5 Disassemble the filter
Tool used: Spanner (7 mm), Allen wrench (2 mm)
swab
●Disassemble the filter using the spanner and Allen wrench
Swab Filter ●Condition after disassembly

Spanner Allen wrench
Attach the bracket Attach the head

11 Tool used: Allen wrench (2.5 mm) 12 and perform
calibration
(→P.10-1)
●Four screws
Two on the front
Two on the rear

Describes how to replace an air filter element of the placement head (8-nozzle).
Tool used: Torque wrench (N510050388AA), Long type bit (Hex. side 5 mm, N510046662AA),
Allen wrench (2.5 mm), Allen wrench (2 mm) Spanner (7 mm)
Time required: 130 minutes (per head) Life time (reference): 6000 [ h ]
1 Detach the head

(→P.10-1)
2 Remove the bracket
Tool used: Allen wrench (2.5 mm)
●Four screws
Two on the front
Two on the rear
8 Replace the air filter element 7 Clean inside the

filter using a
O-ring swab
No.: N510068213AA
●O-ring product
No.: N510059865AA
●Confirm whether the O-ring is

deteriorated. If so, replace it.
Air filter element Swab
Assemble the Attach the tube

9 filter 10 Attach the filter
11
Tool used: Tool used: Spanner (7mm)
Spanner (7mm) ●8 locations
●8 locations
Allen wrench (2mm)
Filter Tube

Remove screws for the wiring
3 fixing bracket 4 Remove the tube
Tool used: Allen wrench(2.5 mm) ●8 locations
Consumable parts
replacement
●Four screws Tube
6 Disassemble the filter

Tool used: Spanner (7 mm), Allen wrench(2 mm)
5 Remove the filter
Tool used: Spanner (7 mm)

●Disassemble the filter using the spanner Allen wrench ●8 locations
Filter ●Condition after disassembly

Spanner Allen wrench
Filter
12 Attach the screws for the wiring fixing

bracket and attach the bracket 13 Attach the head
and perform
Tool used: Allen wrench (2.5mm) calibration
(→P.10-1)
●Four screws ●Four screws (Two on each sides)

Describes the procedure for replacing the air filter element of the placement head (2-nozzle).
Tool used: Allen wrench (opposite side 2.5 mm) , swab
Time required: 5 minutes (per head)
Limited-life(reference)：6000 [h]
1 2
SERVO
OFF
8 Attach the cap

7 Replace the air filter element

O-ring No.: N510059196AA
●Make sure that the air filter

element is inserted all the way to
the end.
●O-ring product
●Attach the filter using the No.: N510059865AA
Allen wrench. Cap
●Tightening torque : Air filter element ●Confirm whether the O-ring is
0.5 ±0.1 N・m deteriorated. If so, replace it.
Unlock the
9 10 machine and 11
SERVO
ON
ON

Push the X-axis to the other side of the Turn OFF the
3 head to be replaced 4 power and lock
Linear scale the machine
protective cover ●When the front head is replaced,
move the front head to the rear
side. Replace it from the rear side.
●Be careful not to apply force to

the X-axis linear scale protective
cover during filter replacement.
Consumable parts
replacement
(The cover may be deformed and
it may let it interfere with the
leaner scale reading head.) OFF
Remove the cap

6 Clean the filter
mount part
5
Vacuum sensor
Cap
Filter
mount part
●Remove the filter with the cap
●Using a cotton swab, together using the Allen wrench.
remove all dust inside the ●One vacuum sensor is installed on
filter mount part. each placement head (total of 2).
WARNING

12 Calibration
Maintenance
Over- Calibration
12-1-1 view performance
To maximize the machine’s capability, you need to adjust parameters installed on the machine to the site
environment. This task is called calibration.
Chapter 12 describes the calibration method.
■Do this task if any of the following events should occur;

●Relocation of the machine.
●Replacement of unit(s).
●Floor level change.
■Observe the following conditions as you perform the task.

●Turn ON the main power switch of the machine at least one hour before you start the task.
●Do not warm up the machine before you start the task.
●Wait for over an hour to start the task, immediately after the machine stops production or warm-up
operation.
NPM-D3 12-1-1-1 EJM6DE-MB-12M-01

Calibration
NPM-D3 12-1-1-2 EJM6DE-MB-12M-01

Maintenance
Over- Calibration item and
12-1-2 view action
■Calibration item and action

Changes in machine condition
and calibrations to be performed Time
STEP Item Action Relocation, required
Replacement
change in [Min]
of head 1)
floor level
Camera angle   5
Head camera XY origin
STEP1 XY origin camera scale   5
Plane correction XY Plane correction XY   30

Height measurement 5)  5
Plane correction Z 5)  20
Plane correction Z
Dummy dispensing
() () 5
height
Width adjustment Width adjustment   10
STEP2 Placement Height measurement   5
position/Conveyor PCB stop position   5
Height sensor
Height measurement () () 10
(option)
Placement load Placement load
  15
(2-nozzle head) measurement F1 and F2
Head  origin   5
Camera offset   10
Scan position 4)5) 4)
Nozzle changer height 4)5) 
Jig station Head camera lighting  
402)
(per head) Multi-recognition camera
4)5) 
lighting
Head offset 4)5) 4)
Head  origin () () 5
STEP3 Dispensing head (option)
Head offset () () 5
White balance adjustment   5
White balance (option: 2D
inspection head) Get target values of
  5
calibrated PCB
Camera offset (option:2D
- ()  5
inspection head)
Image quality correction
- ()  30
(option: 2D inspection head)
Inspection plane correction
- ()  5
(option: 2D inspection head)
Pickup position Pickup position   10
Pickup height () 
STEP4 Tray (option) Pickup position 1 ()  10
Pickup position 2 () 
Transfer Height measurement () () 10
NPM-D3 12-1-2-1 EJM6DE-MB-12M-01

Changes in machine condition
and calibrations to be performed Time
STEP Item Action Relocation, required
Replacement
change in [Min]
of head 1)
floor level
Placement accuracy, Reflection 4)5) 4) 30
Placement accuracy, Verification 4)5) 4) 30
Accuracy 2D inspection head, Reflection (option) ()  15

verification 2Dinspection head, Verification (option) ()  15
Dispensing head accuracy, Reflection (option) () () 15
Dispensing head accuracy, Verification (option) () () 15
:Perform ():Perform only on a machine with any optional unit

*1) Perform calibration only on the table of which the unit has been replaced.
*2) Time required for the light weight 16-nozzle head. 12-, 8-, and 2-nozzle heads require 35, 30, and 20
minutes, respectively.
*3) Calibration is also required when APC option is purchased and a head is installed.
*4) It is not carried out for the dispensing head.
Calibration
*5) It is not carried out for the 2D inspection head.
NPM-D3 12-1-2-2 EJM6DE-MB-12M-01

Maintenance
Over- Jigs used for
12-1-3 view calibration
■STEP 1 ■STEP 3
Menu Jig Menu Jig
Head camera XY origin  Multi-recognition Multi-recognition camera jig
Plane correction XY
camera For light weight 16-,
12-, 8-Nozzle head
(N610071657AA)
*1)
Plane correction jig For 2-nozzle head

(N210141055AA) (N610003301AA)
■STEP 2
Jig station
Menu Jig
12-, Light weight 16-nozzle
Plane correction Z head
:230CS
Placement 8-nozzle head
Jig station
position/Conveyor :230C
(N610087861AA)
2-nozzle head
:1002 nozzle Two jig
components
(N610102559AA)
Light luminosity jig
(N610114318AA)
Placement height teaching jig
(N610003319AA) Light weight 16-,12-nozzle
head
Width adjustment  :153AS nozzle
8-nozzle head
Placement load :184-nozzle
2-nozzle head
:1003-nozzle
Placement load Dispensing head

measurement jig 
(option)
(N610084605AA)
Camera offset
(option: 2D inspection 
head)
Load cell meter White balance

(N610093887AC) (option: 2D inspection
head)
User master board
(gray)
(N610106576AA)
1003 nozzle Image quality


(KXFX037UA00) correction (option: 2D
inspection head)
Height sensor Inspection place
(option) correction
(option: 2D inspection *1)
head) Plane correction jig
Height sensor jig
(N610122649AA) (N210141055AA)
1) The plane correction jig for NPM-W cannot be

NOTICE
used. For other jigs, they are common to the
230CS and 230C nozzles are not included with the ones for NPM series.
calibration jig (option). Please prepare them on your
own.
NPM-D3 12-1-3-1 EJM6DE-MB-12M-01

■STEP 4
Menu Jig
Pickup position
Pickup position height

teaching jig
(N610003318AA)
Light weight 16-,12-nozzle

head
: 230CS nozzle
8-nozzle head
: 230C nozzle
2-nozzle head
: 1002 nozzle
Tray 8-nozzle head

: 230C nozzle
2-nozzle head
Calibration
: 1002 nozzle
Transfer 2-nozzle head

: 1003 nozzle
NPM-D3 12-1-3-2 EJM6DE-MB-12M-01

Maintenance
Over-
Explanation of screen
12-1-4 view
A Calibration process
B Items of each calibration

process
Actions to execute and actions

C required for preparation
A D C
D Parameter
Indicates the parameters set up by
calibration. Pressing this button displays
the parameters currently registered.
NPM-D3 12-1-4-1 EJM6DE-MB-12M-01

Calibration
NPM-D3 12-1-4-2 EJM6DE-MB-12M-01

Maintenance
Head camera XY origin

12-2
Explains the method for calibrating the head camera’s XY origin, taking for an example, the 12-nozzle head;
however, the same method can also be applied to the light weight 16-, 8-, and 2-nozzle heads.
You must operate the machine under the pre-operation status in the following environmental conditions;
temperature: 10 to 35 ℃ and humidity: 25 to 75 % RH.
2 1
1 Choose a table
●Choose the table to calibrate.
2 +
(The camera angle is calibrated)
3 Confirm that it has been

successfully completed
(The XY origin camera scale is

calibrated)

4 5

●Perform steps 1 to 4 for the
other table.
Calibration
●When you do not save the data

6
●To cancel
(The screen remains as it is in 5 .)
(XY unit moves to the origin)

Maintenance
Plane correction XY 1
12-3
Explains the method for calibrating the plane correction XY, taking for an example, the 12-nozzle head;
however, the same method can also be applied to the light weight 16-, 8-, and 2-nozzle heads. For the
inspection head (→P.12-15)
●Perform calibration in dual lane mode. (→P.10-2)
●Place the plane correction jig on the transfer conveyor to the left or right of the machine by hand and
operate it. (plane correction jig: N210141055AA)
●Perform calibration on lane 1 and 2 at once.
●Do not turn OFF the power of the machine during calibration.
●Remove all the PCB support pins before performing plane correction.
●Calibrate it at the front to enhance workability.
1 Check that there are no PCBs

present inside the machine
●If ‘error’ message appears, remove all

the PCBs remaining inside the machine,
and try again.
(The width is adjusted)

(The head moves to the retraction position)
Prepare for the first plane

2 correction XY
3 Servo switch OFF

Set the plane correction jig
5 ① Set the plane-correction jig to both
lane 1 and 2 with adjusting the right edge
of the jig to the reference mark at the
upper side of the forward rail.
(Common to both the left-to-right and
right-to-left flows.)
Plane-correction
jig
Reference mark(b)
Reference mark(b)
Edge of plane correction jig
Calibration
Reference mark(a)
② Set the reference mark (b) on the rail
reference side.
③Press the jig against the reference rail.
Reference mark(a) 7 Servo switch ON

Edge of plane correction jig
8 +

Maintenance
Plane correction XY 2
12-3
9
Confirm that it has been
9 successfully completed
10
(The plane correction XY data is saved)
●To cancel
(The screen remains as it is

in 9 )

Prepare for removing the plane
11 correction jig
12 Servo switch OFF
Push the plane correction jig

14
Calibration
out of the machine by hand
through the left-hand or right-
hand transfer conveyor.
Close the safety cover

15
16 Servo switch ON
17
+
(Completes plane correction XY
operation)
●To cancel

in 9 )

Maintenance
Head / Plane
12-4 calibration Z 1
Placement head 1
Explains the method for calibrating the plane correction Z, taking for an example, the 12-nozzle head;
however, the same method can also be applied to the light weight 16-, 8-, and 2-nozzle heads.
2 4 1
1 Choose a head to perform

plane correction Z
or
3 Choose nozzle positions to

measure the height
●On the default screen, all the nozzle
positions are selected. If there is a
nozzle position which you do not wish
to calibrate, deselect it by pressing its
box.
4 +
(The head moves to the work position)

5 Prepare for height
measurement
6 Servo switch OFF
Install nozzles to the nozzle

8 positions selected in step 3
Calibration
●Nozzle used
Nozzle head Nozzle type
16
230CS
12
8 230C
2 1002
10 Servo switch ON
11
(The height measurement is completed)
●To cancel
(The screen remains as it is in 3)

Maintenance
Head / Plane
Placement head 2


●If it has been successfully completed,
the display of each nozzle position is
changed from '-' to 'OK'.
12
13 Prepare for plane correction Z
14 Servo switch OFF
16 Check the nozzle installation

positions
●Nozzle used
Nozzle Nozzle Nozzle

head position type
16 No. 5
230CS
12 No. 4
8 No. 3 230C
2 No. 2 1002

18 Servo switch ON
19
Calibration
■To cancel

in 13 )
20
(Calibration for the plane correction Z

21 starts)

21 successfully completed, and
choose the other table for
plane correction Z and then
repeat steps from 2 to 20

Maintenance
Head / Plane
Placement head 3
22

23
(The plane correction Z data is saved)

■When you do not save the data
■To cancel
(The screen remains as it is in 22 )

24 Prepare to remove nozzles
25 Servo switch OFF
Calibration
27 Remove nozzles
29 Servo switch ON
30
■To cancel
(The screen remains as it is in 22. )

Maintenance
Head / Plane
Dispensing head 1
● Install the screw unit that a calibration nozzle (nozzle no. 7202) is previously set, and fill up adhesives by
Eject Confirm in advance.(→[Operating procedure] P.3-4)
● Before calibration, be sure that there is no adhesive stuck to the nozzle tip, otherwise you may not obtain
accurate height offset.
2 3 1 Choose a head to perform

1 plane correction Z
or
2
Choose nozzle positions to
3 measure the height
●On the default screen, all the nozzle
positions are selected. If there is a
nozzle position which you do not wish
to calibrate, deselect it by pressing its
4 box.
●You are free to choose the number of
nozzle positions.
4 +
(Completes height measure)


●If it has been successfully completed,
the display of each nozzle position is
changed from '-' to 'OK'.
+
6
(Completes plane correction Z)
Calibration
8 (The Dummy dispensing height is

calibrated)
10

successfully completed, and
choose the other nozzle
positions for plane correction
Z and then repeat steps from
2 to 9

Maintenance
Head / Plane
Dispensing head 2
11

12
(The plane correction Z data is saved)
ATTENTION
When this calibration is performed, adhesives may stains to the reference post or on
the rail. If so, please wipe it off with a cloth.

Calibration
NPM-D3 12-4-10 EJM6DE-MB-12M-01

Maintenance
Width adjustment
12-5
Explains the method for calibrating the width adjustment of the transfer conveyor.
1 2
1 or
2 +
●The conveyor width is adjusted to the

reference width of 316 mm.

(→P.3-2)
4 Servo switch OFF

(→P.3-3)
Measure the conveyor width

7 with a vernier caliper
Attach the feeder table cover

8 (→P.3-3)
10 Servo switch ON

(→P.3-2)

12
12 Adjust the transfer conveyor width
+ or
●Enter the difference between the

measured value in step 7 and 316.6mm
into “Offset” using the [Key rate], and
adjust the transfer conveyor width to fall
between 316.5 and 316.7 mm.
●When pressing [Key rate], you can
change the response.
14
Calibration
13 Repeat steps from 4 to 12
until the above reference width
is achieved
14
(The offset value is set)
■When you do not save offset

15

Maintenance
Placement position/
12-6 Conveyor 1
This operation procedure is also shared by the light weight 16-, 12-, 8-, 2-nozzle heads, and dispensing heads.
●For the dispensing head, the screw being set the calibration nozzle (No. 7202) must be installed to the
dispensing head in advance, and refill adhesives during ejection check. (→[Operating procedure] P.3-4)
Also before calibration is performed, ensure that no adhesive adheres to the nozzle tip.
■When width adjustment is performed in the pre-process

1 2
2 Confirm the end processing of

the conveyor
+
(Calibration is carried out)

■To cancel
(The screen stays as it is in 14

on P.12-5-2)
■When width adjustment is not performed in the pre-process

3
3 +

4 Servo switch OFF
Calibration
6 Set the placement-height

teaching jigs
●Align a jig to the reference mark on the
upper surface of the right edge PCB
clamp*1)
*1)PCB clamp ●Align the jigs on both lane 1 and 2 to
the reference mark*2) on the right edge
seen from the machine front side
(Set the jigs to the same position for
both ‘left to right flow’ and ‘right to left
flow’)
●Set the jigs in such a manner that the
letter stamp on the jig faces top and a
small hole*3) on the jig seen from the
machine front side comes to the bottom
right side
8
*3)Small hole of jig *2)Reference mark on the right
Servo switch ON
9 +
9
Maintenance
Placement position/
12-6 Conveyor 2
10
10 +
11 Prepare to install nozzles
12 Servo switch OFF
Install nozzles
14 ●Nozzle used

head position type
16 No. 5
230CS
12 No. 4
8 No. 3 230C
2 No. 2 1002
●For the dispensing head, it is necessary

to install the screw unit that a calibration
nozzle (nozzle no. 7202) is previously
set to the nozzle position 2.

16 Servo switch ON
17
■To cancel
18
Calibration
(the screen remains as it is in 1 )

(Automatically adjusts the position of

placement height teaching jig and starts
measuring the stop position.)
19


Maintenance
Placement position/
12-6 Conveyor 3
20
(The height measurement data is saved)

●To cancel
22 Servo switch OFF
24 Remove nozzles
26 Servo switch ON

27
●To cancel
28 Servo switch OFF
Calibration
Remove the placement-height

30 teaching jig
32 Servo switch ON
33
●To cancel

Maintenance
Placement position/
12-6 Conveyor 4
■About the conveyor mode

The operation screen varies according to whether the conveyor mode is dual lane mode or single lane
mode.
The operation screen switches according to the conveyor mode automatically.
In dual lane mode, you can select the lane 1 or the lane 2, allowing calibration of each lane.
For single lane mode, only the lane 1 is targeted.
The operation is the same.
A)For dual lane mode
B)For single lane mode

Calibration

Maintenance
Height sensor 1
12-7 (option)
The surface height of several points on the PCB top surface is measured by the height sensor, and
according to the result, PCB warpage condition is predicted and the nozzle lowering position is controlled
for placement operation. This operation procedure is also shared by the light weight 16-, 12-, 8- and 2-
nozzle heads. Remove all support pins before performing calibration.
2 3 1
Select a table
1 ●Select a table to perform calibration.
(Work only at the front side)
2
3 +
(Confirm whether any PCB remains on

the transfer rail)
●If there is PCB, remove it followed by
the instruction on the screen.
4
Confirm the message
4
■When you do not work
(The head remains as it is in 1 )
5 Servo switch OFF
7 Remove the PCB-support pin as

necessary
(→[Operating procedure] P.2-5-3)

Measurement part Slide and set the height teaching
8 jig from the standby side
●Confirm that there is no contamination
teaching jig or stain on the measurement part
●For calibration of the height sensor,
jigs on both the front and rear heads
are set to lane 1.
●Push the jig to the fixed side on the
rail, and set the jig as the right edge of
the jig matches to the mark on the
conveyor. (The picture on the left is for
left to right flow.)
●For right to left flow, the left edge of
Reference mark the jig shall be matched to the mark on
(Left→right flow) the conveyor
Conveyor side
Mark (φ1 hole)
Calibration
Reference mark
10 Servo switch ON
(Right→ left flow)
Conveyor side
Mark (φ1 hole)
: PCB flow direction
11
11 +
(The head moves to the set position)
12 Servo switch OFF

Maintenance
Height sensor 2
12-7 (option)
14
Confirm the message and
14 install the nozzle
(The screen show for light weight16-
nozzle head)
●Nozzle
Head position type
16 No. 5
230CS
12 No. 4
8 No. 3 230C
2 No. 2 1003
●For the dispensing head, it is
necessary to install the screw unit that
a calibration nozzle (nozzle no. 7202)
is previously set to the nozzle position
2.
17
16 Servo switch ON
17
(The screen show for light weight16-
nozzle head)
18
18 +
(The head operates for measurement)

19

20 Pressing other menu screen

appears confirmation message
of data save
(The data obtained by calibration is

saved)
20
■When you do not save
Calibration
cleared
■To cancel
21 Servo switch OFF
23 Remove the nozzle

Maintenance
Height sensor 3
12-7 (option)
25 Servo switch ON
26
26 +
■When you do not remove the nozzle
(The head remains as it is in 19 )
27 Servo switch OFF
29 Remove the height sensor jig
31 Servo switch ON
32
32 +
(Confirm whether any PCB remains on
the transfer rail)
■When you do not remove the jig PCB

Calibration

Maintenance Place-
Placement load 1
12-8-1 ment
load
The operation procedure is applicable only to the 2-nozzle head.
3 2 1
Choose a table
1 ●Choose a table to calibrate.
3 +

4 Prepare to remove a jig
5 Servo switch OFF
NPM-D3 12-8-1-1 EJM6DE-MB-12M-01

Mount load
measurement jig
7 Set the mount load

measurement jig
●Place the jig against the reference
side of the rail, and set it so that the
right edge of the jig is aligned with the
end face of the conveyor’s PCB clamp.
Upper rail Front
8 Set the power code to any
Calibration
connector of the feeder cart’s
Mount load
power supply section
measurement jig
Prevent the wire from interfering with

the head.
(Pass it through the nozzle changer and
the cable carrier)
Load cell meter
10 Servo switch ON
Power supply section
NPM-D3 12-8-1-2 EJM6DE-MB-12M-01

Maintenance Place-
Placement load 2
12-8-1 ment
load
11
●To cancel
13 12
12
(Each time you press it, the nozzle
position № changes)
●Choose the position to perform
calibration.
13 +
15 Servo switch OFF
NPM-D3 12-8-1-3 EJM6DE-MB-12M-01

17 Install nozzles
●Install them to the nozzle positions to
be measured.
(Use 1003 nozzle)
19 Servo switch ON
20
Calibration
●To cancel

in 12 )
21 +
●Reads a stable numerical value being

measured.
Load meas displays the standardized
value rather than the maximum value
since the numerical value goes up
momentarily when the nozzle and the
jig come in contact with each other so
that it becomes difficult to read the
measurement value accurately.
●How to change the load cell meter
display. (→P.12-8-2)
21
NPM-D3 12-8-1-4 EJM6DE-MB-12M-01

Maintenance Place-
Placement load 3
12-8-1 ment
load
22

23 Press the numerical part

(The numerical keypad appears)
23
24 Enter the measured value

●Enter the value read in 21.
Input range: 3.2 to 6.2 N
24
25 +

measured.
display (→P.12-8-2)
25
NPM-D3 12-8-1-5 EJM6DE-MB-12M-01

26


27
28
Calibration
Enter the measured value
28 ●Enter the value read in 25.
Input range: 15 to 25 N
29
29 +

measured.
display (→P.12-8-2)
NPM-D3 12-8-1-6 EJM6DE-MB-12M-01

Maintenance Place-
Placement load 4
12-8-1 ment
load
30


31
32
32 Enter the measured value

●Enter the value read in 29 .
33
●As for the other nozzle positions,

repeat steps from to .
12 33
NPM-D3 12-8-1-7 EJM6DE-MB-12M-01

34
34 Choose the other table

●As for the other table, repeat steps
from 3 to 33 .
Calibration
35
35

saved)
36
(It returns to the origin, and the data
obtained by calibration is lost)
■To cancel

in )
34
NPM-D3 12-8-1-8 EJM6DE-MB-12M-01

Maintenance Place-
Placement load 5
12-8-1 ment
load
38 Servo switch OFF
40 Remove nozzles
42 Servo switch ON
43
■To cancel
NPM-D3 12-8-1-9 EJM6DE-MB-12M-01

44 Prepare to remove jig
45 Servo switch OFF
Remove the placement load

47 measurement jig
Calibration
49 Servo switch ON
50
■To cancel
NPM-D3 12-8-1-10 EJM6DE-MB-12M-01

Place- How to use placement load
Maintenance
12-8-2 ment
load
measurement jig (option) 1
Jig configuration
B
C
G
D E
No. Unit name Function Q’ty
The unit designed specifically for the 3-nozzle head that is used, for
example, in the load control calibration to replace the head.
A Load cell meter 1
Power supply specs.: 24 V DC 7 VA
Mass: 1.2 kg Dimension: 120 mm(W) x 8 0mm(H) x 19 0mm(D)
Load measurement sensor. Connect it to the load cell meter to use.
B Load cell 1
Mass: 600 g
Weight to calibrate the load cell meter stated in A . 1
C Weight
Mass: 100 g/1 kg each
D Display Displays a load value. ---
E Power switch Power switch of the load cell meter’s main unit. ---
Sensor cable
F Connect it to the load cell with the attached cable. ---
connector
G Power cable Connect it to the feeder supply unit and supply the power. ---
NPM-D3 12-8-2-1 EJM6DE-MB-12M-01

Names and functions of operation buttons
Each letter of the alphabet used in describing the

set data or contents is as follows.
UP
Calibration
SHIFT
MODE
LEVEL
MAX/MIN
Resets or changes
the display between
MAX/MIN Current, MAX and
MIN values
Changes the
value
LEVEL
Changes display
parameters
MODE
Changes values set

to parameters and
SHIFT shift the digit of the
set values
Changes the set
values and
UP sets/cancels zero
forcing
NPM-D3 12-8-2-2 EJM6DE-MB-12M-01

Maintenance
12-8-2 ment
load
Calibration method 1
●You do not need to set the value because it is already initialized before shipment.
●Please calibrate the jig or the load cell after you replace it. Also, it is recommended that you calibrate it
every year.
1 Turn ON the power
3
Hold down
2 for at least three seconds
3 Confirm the input range

■If the screen display differs
(The screen display flashes)
2 4 3 Choose it with
4
(The input range is set)
5 Confirm the power-supply

frequency
Choose it with
6 5
6
(The power-supply frequency is set)
NPM-D3 12-8-2-3 EJM6DE-MB-12M-01

7 Put a 100g weight on the load
cell
8 9
8
(The value is displayed, and the lamp
flashes)
9 Confirm that the display value

becomes stable
Calibration
(Teaching is complete and then the lamp
changes from flashing to illumination)
10 8 9
10
(The input value 1 is set)
11
Confirm the display value
11 ■If the screen display differs
(The display flashes)
Choose it with
12 11 12
(The display value 1 is set)
NPM-D3 12-8-2-4 EJM6DE-MB-12M-01

Maintenance
12-8-2 ment
load
Calibration method 2
13 Put a 1kg weight on the load cell
14 15
14
(The value is displayed, and the lamp
flashes)
Confirm that the display value

15 becomes stable
(Teaching is complete and then the lamp

changes from flashing to illumination)
16 14 15
16
(The input value 2 is set)
17
17 Confirm the display value

(The display flashes)
Choose it with
18 17
18 (The display value 2 is set)
NPM-D3 12-8-2-5 EJM6DE-MB-12M-01

19
19 Confirm the decimal point position

■To change
Choose it with
21 20 19
20
(The decimal point position is set)
Calibration
21 Hold down
for at least a second

(Returns to the operation level)
NPM-D3 12-8-2-6 EJM6DE-MB-12M-01

Maintenance
Multi-recognition
12-9 camera 1
Explains the multi-recognition camera operating procedure, taking for an example, the 12-nozzle head;
however, the same procedure can also be applied to the light weight16-, 8-, and 2-nozzle heads.
Remove the feeder, if any, from the table you are going to calibrate beforehand.
2 1
1 Choose a head
●Choose the head you want to
calibrate.
2 +

3 Servo switch OFF
Install the multi-recognition

5 camera jig
●Nozzles used
Multi-recognition camera jig Nozzle Nozzle
head position
16 No. 5
12 No. 4
8 No. 3
Calibration
For light weight16-, 12-, 8- For 2-nozzle head
nozzle head 2 No. 2
7 Servo switch ON

8 +
■To cancel
9

in 1 )


Maintenance
Multi-recognition
12-9 camera 2
10 Prepare to attach the jig
11 Servo switch OFF
13 Replace the multi-recognition

camera jig
●Nozzles that you confirm
Nozzle Nozzle position

head
Before After
replace replace
16 No. 5 No. 12
12 No. 4 No. 9
8 No. 3 No. 6
2 No. 2 No. 1
15 Servo switch ON

16
(The multi-recognition camera is

calibrated)
■To cancel

in 1 )
17
Calibration
Prepare to install the jig
18 Servo switch OFF
■ For other than 2-nozzle head
Perform steps after 26 .

■ For 2-nozzle head
Perform steps after this.

Maintenance
Multi-recognition
12-9 camera 3
20 Confirm the head installation

angle
●Check the direction of a nozzle holder
claw.
Front XY unit: The claw is right side viewed
from the front side
Rear XY unit: The claw is left side viewed
from the rear side
Arrow view A
Nozzle holder claw
A Nozzle holder claw
22 Servo switch ON

■If the nozzle holder claw is not on the
left side,
23
(Rotates 180 degree and

measures again)
■To cancel

in 1 )

24 Servo switch OFF
26 Replace the multi-recognition

camera jig
●Nozzles that you confirm
Nozzle position
Nozzle Before After
head replace replace
16 No. 12 No. 5
Calibration
12 No. 9 No. 4
8 No. 6 No. 3
2 No. 1 No. 2
28 Servo switch ON
+
(The line camera is calibrated)
29
■To cancel

in )
1

Maintenance
Multi-recognition
12-9 camera 4

+
(The camera offset is calibrated)
30 prepare to confirm the multi-

31 recognition camera jig
32 Servo switch OFF
Confirm that the multi-

34 recognition camera jig is
installed
●Nozzles used
Nozzle Nozzle
head position
16 No. 5
12 No. 4
8 No. 3
2 No. 2

36 Servo switch ON
■To cancel
37
Calibration
in 1 )
38 39
●Repeat steps from 1 to 38 for
the other table.
39

Maintenance
Multi-recognition
12-9 camera 5
(The calibration data is saved)

40
●To cancel

in )
38
41 Prepare to remove the jig

nozzle
42 Servo switch OFF
Open the safety cover

43
44 Remove the jig nozzle
46 Servo switch ON
47 ■To cancel

Calibration
NPM-D3 12-9-10 EJM6DE-MB-12M-01

Maintenance
Jig station 1
12-10
Jig station configuration
H
E
B
F
C
I G D
No. Unit name Functions Q’ty
This is the unit used for head parameter calibration, for example,
when you replace the head. It can be shared by all the heads.
Power specifications: 12V DC (8 AA batteries) Prepare on your own.
(→P.11-3 Replacing NPM batteries)
A Jig station 1
Caution: If the batteries are left inside, they may leak; therefore,
if you do not use the jig station for a long period,
remove and store them.
Mass: 1.5kg Dimensions: 240mm (W) x 215mm (D) x 35mm (H)
Jig components used for calibration.

B Jig components 2
They are used by installing to the jig station.
Multi-recognition
Jig used for luminosity calibration of LED lighting on the multi-
C camera LED 1
recognition camera. It is used by installing to the jig station.
Light luminosity jig
Nozzle used for calibration.
For light weight 16-nozzle head, 12-nozzle head: 153AS nozzle 2
D Calibration nozzle
For 8-nozzle head : 184 nozzle each
For 2-nozzle head : 1003 nozzle
Head camera LED The jig that is used in calibrating LED light’s luminosity on the head
E ---
Light luminosity jig camera is set to the place.
When turning ON the power, green LED illuminates. (If not, replace
F Main power switch ---
the battery)
G Photo sensor amplifier The sensor that detects jig components. ---
It is used for recognition. Jig components are set to it when you

H Jig recognition section ---
calibrate.
Jig components and light luminosity jig are set to this section before
I Jig storage section ---
calibration.
NPM-D3 12-10-1 EJM6DE-MB-12M-01

Explains the jig station operating method, taking for an example, the 12-nozzle head; however, the same
procedure can also be applied to the light weight16-, 8-, and 2-nozzle heads.
●Make sure that there are no nozzles present in the nozzle changer. Remove all the PCB support pins.
Choose a table
1 ●Choose the table for calibration.
Choose a measurement item

2 (The selected items are displayed in
light blue color, and, all the rest, in gray)
■For the placement head,
Calibration
Choose all measurement items.
■For the dispensing head/2D inspection

head,
Choose only.
2 3
3 +


+

4
5 Prepare to install the jig station
6 Servo switch OFF
NPM-D3 12-10-2 EJM6DE-MB-12M-01

Maintenance
Jig station 2
12-10
●Jig station
8 Set jig components and the

light luminosity jig to the jig
station
●Each of the two has no particular
orientation by itself.
●Jig component, light and luminosity jig
placement part.
Jig components
Power supply
switch
Jig storage Light
unit luminosity jig
Place the jig station on the

9 transfer conveyor
●Align the end face of the jig station
with the reference mark on upper
surface of the front rail.
●Make sure to place it in the right
direction.
●Left-to-right flow ●Right-to-left flow
Reference Reference
mark mark
(φ1 hole) (φ1 hole)
Jig station
: PCB flow direction
Turn ON the power of the jig

10 station
●Check that the LED lamp is
illuminated.
NPM-D3 12-10-3 EJM6DE-MB-12M-01

12 Servo switch ON
■To cancel
13
Calibration
14 ■To cancel
16 Servo switch OFF
NPM-D3 12-10-4 EJM6DE-MB-12M-01

Maintenance
Jig station 3
12-10
18 Install nozzles
●Nozzle used
Nozzle Nozzle Nozzle type

head position
16 No. 5 and 9
153AS
12 No. 4 and 7
8 No. 3 and 6 184
2 All 1003
20 Servo switch ON
21 ■To cancel

in 2 )
23 22
22 +
(The selected measurement item is

calibrated)

●Repeat steps from 1 to 23
from the other table.
NPM-D3 12-10-5 EJM6DE-MB-12M-01

24
24
Calibration

25 (The head moves to the retraction position)
■To cancel

in 23 )
26 Servo switch OFF
NPM-D3 12-10-6 EJM6DE-MB-12M-01

Maintenance
Jig station 4
12-10
28 Remove the jig station
30 Servo switch ON
■Detach the feeder cart (→P.3-2)

31 ■To cancel

in 25 )

from the nozzle changer
■For the dispensing head/2D inspection head,

・Perform after the step 38 .
33 Servo switch OFF
35 Remove nozzles from the

nozzle changer
NPM-D3 12-10-7 EJM6DE-MB-12M-01

37 Servo switch ON
■To cancel
38

in )
24
Calibration
NPM-D3 12-10-8 EJM6DE-MB-12M-01

Maintenance
Jig station 5
12-10
For abnormal end
When calibration abends, the following screen is displayed. The calibration results are not saved.
1
(Returns to the calibration screen and
shows the values prior to calibration)
NPM-D3 12-10-9 EJM6DE-MB-12M-01

Calibration
NPM-D3 12-10-10 EJM6DE-MB-12M-01

Maintenance
Dispensing head 1
12-11
● Install the screw unit that a calibration nozzle (nozzle no. 7202) is previously set, and fill up
adhesives by Eject Confirm in advance. (→[Operating procedure] P.3-4)
2 3 1 4
1 Choose a table
2
3 Choose a head position
5
4 Choose whether dummy
dispensing enables or not
5 +
NPM-D3 12-11-1 EJM6DE-MB-12M-01

7

+
7
9 8
Calibration
8 successfully completed, and
choose the other head
positions for plane correction
Z and then repeat steps from
to 3 . 7
9
(The confirmation scree of data save
appears)

10 saved)
NPM-D3 12-11-2 EJM6DE-MB-12M-01

Maintenance
Dispensing head 2
12-11
11
13 Servo switch OFF
15 Remove nozzles
17 Servo switch ON
18
19
NPM-D3 12-11-3 EJM6DE-MB-12M-01

■When adhesive other than recommended (ADE820DX, ADE850D) is used
Calibration might not be performed properly due to material characteristics. Follow the procedure below.
Calibration
1
2
Updates the value for calibration by using
the set value in the ‘Action setting’.
3
Exits the condition check window.
A Action setting
Change the settings of [Dispenser time
(s)], [Temperature (℃)] and [Pressure
(MPa)] based on the adhesive to use.
2 3 ●If the dispensing diameter is longer
Time: Set to shorter
Temperature: Set to lower
Pressure: Set to lower
●If dispensing diameter is shorter

Time: Set to longer
Temperature: Set to higher
Pressure: Set to higher
NPM-D3 12-11-4 EJM6DE-MB-12M-01

Maintenance
Dispensing head 3
12-11
4 +
●If an action is abnormally ended, re-

adjust the set value of action setting.
6 Servo switch OFF
8 Install the jig nozzle and

syringe
10 Servo switch ON
NPM-D3 12-11-5 EJM6DE-MB-12M-01

11
12 12
(The confirmation scree of data save

appears)
Calibration

13 saved)

+
14
NPM-D3 12-11-6 EJM6DE-MB-12M-01

Maintenance
Dispensing head 4
12-11
15 Servo switch OFF
Remove the jig nozzle and

17 syringe
19 Servo switch ON

+
20

+
(Return to the Home screen)

21
NPM-D3 12-11-7 EJM6DE-MB-12M-01

Calibration
NPM-D3 12-11-8 EJM6DE-MB-12M-01

Maintenance
White balance 1
12-12 (2D inspection head)
The inspection head makes judgment of inspection by comparing brightness of an image captured by the
inspection camera.
Adjust white balance is the feature to register standard brightness on the machine so that inspection is
conducted with the inspection head accordingly.
Calibration plates and user master boards are used to adjust white balance. The machine memorizes
brightness of calibration plates as the target value of calibration plates and checks whether to be any
change in judgment conditions. It means that calibration plates are recognized regularly during production
and that calibration plates are calibrated again if the difference between the target value and the current
value is over or equal to±5%. Brightness variations may occur on calibration plates depending on such
as change in its surface condition. User master boards are used to calibrate this phenomenon.
Please adjust white balance every six months by the following procedure.
Also, acquire the target value of calibration plates and adjust white balance at the same time. It is because
the difference of brightness between user master boards and calibration plates is registered on the
machine. This procedure is exclusive to the inspection head.
2 1
1 Choose a table
3 Enter the target value

●Make sure that the serial number
written on the case of the user master
plate matches.
●Type the target values (R, G, B)
written in the case label according to
3 4 inspection.
Label
A SPI
Solder inspection (after printing)
B AOI
Component inspection (before placement
and after placement)
A
C Target values
B
4 +
NPM-D3 12-12-1 EJM6DE-MB-12M-01

(The head moves to the retraction

5 position.)
Confirm the message and

6 prepare for installing the user
master plate
7 Servo switch OFF
Calibration
Multi-recognition camera Calibration plate

Place the user master plate to
9 the right side of the calibration
jig
Calibration jig User master plate

11 Servo switch ON
ATTENTION
Do not touch the user master plate and calibration plate directly with your bare hands. Doing so they may
get dirt.
CAUTION
Do not climb on equipment, peripheral devices and moving parts
●Calibration jig, Multi-recognition camera
NPM-D3 12-12-2 EJM6DE-MB-12M-01

Maintenance
White balance 2
12

13 position.)
14 Servo switch OFF
Remove the user master board

16 from the left front of the
calibration jig
18 Servo switch ON
19
NPM-D3 12-12-3 EJM6DE-MB-12M-01

20 +
(The inspection head activates and the

measurement value of the calibration jig
is entered)
20
Calibration
(The adjusted white balance values are

displayed.)
21
22
22
NPM-D3 12-12-4 EJM6DE-MB-12M-01

Maintenance
Camera offset
The inspection head measures offset at four reference posts while the camera is calibrated, and the camera
XY position is calibrated by the offset value obtained from four points while the image is captured.
2 1
1 Choose a table
3 +
(The head operates to measure the

camera offset)

(The screen for the measured camera

offsets (X, Y, and  offsets of the
inspection and head cameras) is
displayed.)
NPM-D3 12-13-1 EJM6DE-MB-12M-01

5
Calibration
6
(The screen for the measured camera
offsets (offsets of the four standard posts
in reference to the mark 1) is displayed.
NPM-D3 12-13-2 EJM6DE-MB-12M-01

Maintenance
Image quality correction
The inspection head measures solder and component positions based on an image captured by the color
camera. This function corrects distortion of the camera image in order to make a precise measurement.
The distortion correction plate is used for image correction. The machine corrects the camera image based
on the measurement result using this jig that its accuracy is guaranteed.
1 Servo switch OFF
3 Check a calibration jig and a

distortion correction plate
●When calibration is carried out, make
sure that the calibration jig is securely
tightened and the distortion correction
plate is not dirty.
Calibration jig Distortion correction plate
5 Servo switch ON
NPM-D3 12-14-1 EJM6DE-MB-12M-01

6
6 Choose a table
7 +
(The head operates to measure the
distortion)
Calibration
8

NPM-D3 12-14-2 EJM6DE-MB-12M-01

Maintenance Inspection plane
12-15 correction
(2D inspection head)
This operation is calibration for the inspection head.

Because the plate correction jig will be manually installed, adjust the transport conveyor width on the pre/post
process machines to the plane correction jig width.
●Remove all support pins before calibration.
●This operation must perform together with plane correction XY in STEP 1.
1 Perform plane correction XY in

STEP1
(→P.12-3)
2 Check that there are no PCBs

present inside the machine
●If ‘error’ message appears, remove all

the PCBs remaining inside the machine,
and try again.
5
3
(The conveyor width is adjusted to the

4 plane correction jig width)

position.)
5 +
(Press the button to start measurement)
●After this, the same procedure in

STEP 1, Plane correction XY 1
(→P.12-3) applies.
NPM-D3 12-15-1 EJM6DE-MB-12M-01

Calibration
NPM-D3 12-15-2 EJM6DE-MB-12M-01

Maintenance
Pickup position 1
12-16
Explains the operation procedure, taking for an example, the 12-nozzle head; however, the same
procedure can also be applied to the light weight 16-, 8-, and 2-nozzle heads.
Remove the feeders from the slots indicated in the following conditions beforehand;
●For a feeder cart: No. 1, 2, 3, 8, 9, 10, 15, 16, 17
2 1
1 Choose a table
●Choose the table for calibration.
3 +
(The head moves to the working

position.)
NPM-D3 12-16-1 EJM6DE-MB-12M-01

4 Prepare to install the nozzle
5 Servo switch OFF
7 Install nozzles
Calibration
●Nozzle used

head position type
16 No. 5
230CS
12 No. 4
8 No. 3 230C
2 No. 2 1002
9 Servo switch ON
+
position.)
10 ■To cancel

in 3 )
NPM-D3 12-16-2 EJM6DE-MB-12M-01

Maintenance
Pickup position 2
12-16
11
11 +
12 Install the pickup position

height teaching jig
Pickup position height

teaching jig
●Set the jig to the No. 2 slot located on

the left side of the table selected in
step 1 .
No. 2 slot
13
Confirm the message
13 +
■To cancel
NPM-D3 12-16-3 EJM6DE-MB-12M-01

height teaching jig
●Place the jig to the No. 9 slot located

at the center of the table selected in
step 1 .
Calibration
No. 9 slot
15
■To cancel

in 3 )
NPM-D3 12-16-4 EJM6DE-MB-12M-01

Maintenance
Pickup position 3
12-16

height teaching jig
●Set the jig to the No. 16 slot located

on the right side of the table selected
in step 1.
17 No. 16 slot
■To cancel

in 3 )
19 18

●Repeat steps from 1 to 17
from the other table.
19
NPM-D3 12-16-5 EJM6DE-MB-12M-01

20 Remove the installed pickup
position height teaching jig

21 ■When you do not save the data
■To cancel
Calibration
in )
18
23 Servo switch OFF
25 Remove nozzles
27 Servo switch ON
NPM-D3 12-16-6 EJM6DE-MB-12M-01

Maintenance
Pickup position 4
12-16
■To cancel
28

in 18 )
NPM-D3 12-16-7 EJM6DE-MB-12M-01

Calibration
NPM-D3 12-16-8 EJM6DE-MB-12M-01

Maintenance
Tray 1
12-17
Explains the tray calibration procedure.
●This task cannot be performed when the tray feeder is not installed.
●It is applicable for 8- and 2-nozzle heads.
1 +
3 Servo switch OFF
NPM-D3 12-17-1 EJM6DE-MB-12M-01

Install nozzles for the nozzle
5 changer
●Nozzle used
Nozzle Changer Nozzle
head position type
8 230C
No. 11
2 1002
Calibration
Servo switch ON

8 ■To cancel

in 1 )

NPM-D3 12-17-2 EJM6DE-MB-12M-01

Maintenance
Tray 2
12-17

●For a recognition error,
Change to
10 Using the above buttons, move the

recognition image near the center.
Then, press
or
12 11

12
NPM-D3 12-17-3 EJM6DE-MB-12M-01


13
■To cancel
Calibration
+
(The nozzle is stored to the nozzle
changer No.11)
14 ■To calibrate the tray again
Confirm that it is Home screen,

15 and prepare to remove the
nozzles from the nozzle
changer
NPM-D3 12-17-4 EJM6DE-MB-12M-01

Maintenance
Tray 3
12-17
16 Servo switch OFF
Remove the nozzles from the

18 nozzle changer No.11
20 Servo switch ON
NPM-D3 12-17-5 EJM6DE-MB-12M-01

Calibration
NPM-D3 12-17-6 EJM6DE-MB-12M-01

Maintenance
Transfer 1
12-18
This operation is calibration in the transfer unit.
Information on the relative position for the head height and the transfer stage forming flax is required to
transfer flax to the component. Performing this calibration allows measuring and registering transfer
position offset to calculate the above relative position. If the transfer unit is removed/installed, the transfer
position offset may be varied. Therefore, perform this calibration and register transfer position offset.
●If the transfer unit is not installed, this operation is not available.
●This is applied for the 2-nozzle head.
1
Choose a table
1 ●Choose the table for calibration.
Confirm the message

3
+

3 position.)
■To cancel

in 1 )
4 Prepare to install the nozzle
NPM-D3 12-18-1 EJM6DE-MB-12M-01

5 Servo switch OFF
7 Install nozzles
●Nozzle used

head position type
2 2nd 1003
Calibration
9 Servo switch ON
Confirm the message

10
+

10
■To cancel

in 1 )
NPM-D3 12-18-2 EJM6DE-MB-12M-01

Maintenance
Transfer 2
12-18
15 11

12 To check parameters
(Transitions to the screen of 13 )
12
13
13 Check transfer position

offset
14
(Transitions to the screen of 11 )
14 15
Confirm the message
16
+

16 position.)
■To cancel

in 11 )
NPM-D3 12-18-3 EJM6DE-MB-12M-01

18 Servo switch OFF
Calibration
20 Remove nozzles
22 Servo switch ON
■To cancel
23

in 11 )
NPM-D3 12-18-4 EJM6DE-MB-12M-01

Maintenance Accuracy Overview 1
12-19-1 verifica-
tion (placement head / inspection head / dispensing head)
Explains considerations for accuracy verification.
Accuracy verification
■MCDATA type
MCDATA (production program) is exclusively used for accuracy verifications.
There are the following two types of MCDATA used for placement accuracy verifications.
The front and rear heads execute placement independently from each
Offset Refection MCDATA
other, and the placement locations are measured. This is used to
*The one with “Ost” included in its
reflect the each-position-angle offsets, obtained from measurement
data name
results, separately as the front or rear head use.
Accuracy Verification MCDATA The front and rear heads execute alternate placement that is an
*The one with “Ins” included in its operation close to normal placement, and this is used in measuring the
data name placement locations.
MCDATA filename
D3 - L16 -L16 - F – F _ 05JIG - Ost ＊＊＊
① ② ③ ④ ⑤ ⑥
① Machine name D3 (NPM-D3)

L16: light weight 16-nozzle / M12: 12-nozzle / M08: 8-nozzle / M02: 2-nozzle / NON:
Head
② without heads
configuration
I18: inspection head 18μm / I09: inspection head 9μm / D02: dispensing head
Supply unit
③ F: feeder / ST: single tray
configuration
05JIG: 1005 jig component / 02R: 0402R / 015R: 03015R / BGA: BGA jig
④ Component
component
Ost: for offset reflection use / Ins: for accuracy verification use / InsH: 25μm-ready
⑤ Mode
accuracy verification use
Available
⑥
nozzle
■Reflection of verification data
Make sure not to reflect the each-position-angle offsets, obtained after measurement, in “Accuracy verification
MCDATA” because the MCDATA is used for verification purpose.
When using MCDATA for component placement, the following message appears before the start of production.
Select [Yes] / [No] according to the type of the data you use.
●To use ‘Offset reflection MCDATA’ (-Ost) to verify
placement
●To use ‘Accuracy verification MCDATA’ (-Ins) to verify

placement
NPM-D3 12-19-1-1 EJM6DE-MB-12M-01

■Order of verification
Order of accuracy verification varies according to head specs. In response to the type of the head to be
verified, perform accuracy verifications in the ascending order shown below, ① through ⑥.
16-nozzle 12-nozzle 8-nozzle 2-nozzle
head head head head
Jig chip offset reflection ① ① ① ③*2)
Jig chip accuracy verification ② ② ② ④*2)
Jig chip accuracy verification (25μm support)
②*1) ― ― ―
OP
0402 chip offset reflection ③ ③ ③ ―
0402 chip accuracy verification ④ ④ ④ ―
03015 chip accuracy verification OP ⑤ ― ― ―
BGA offset reflection ― ― ⑤ ①
Calibration
BGA accuracy verification ― ― ⑥ ②
*1) If ±25μm support is selected as an optional extra, perform only a jig chip accuracy verification (25μm
support) OP and refrain from performing a jig chip accuracy verification.
*2) Perform it when using a 2-nozzle head to mount a component with □12mm or less.
■Target value for accuracy verification

NPM-D3 is capable of providing support for high production mode (mounting accuracy 40μm) and high quality
mode (30μm). Use high quality mode in accuracy verifications.
●How to set
(→[Operating Procedure] P.6-1-20 ‘Soft switch
setting’)
Placement accuracy Target value list
Target value
03015 chip component accuracy verification ±0.03mm*1)
0402 chip component accuracy verification ±0.03mm*2)
Jig chip component accuracy verification ±0.03mm
BGA accuracy verification ±0.03mm
*1) Measures when support for 03015 (option) placement is provided
*2) ±0.025mm when support for ±0.025mm (option) is provided
NPM-D3 12-19-1-2 EJM6DE-MB-12M-01

Maintenance
Accuracy Overview 2
12-19-1 verifica-
tion (placement head)
This section describes the procedures for measuring the machine’s placement accuracy and registering
each-angle offset by using that measured result.
Brief description of processes

The dedicated MCDATA (production
program) is used for accuracy verification ■Description of processes
and registering the each-angle offset. 1.Preparation ・Saving calibration DATA (DVD-ROM)
When the each-angle offset is reflected, for production to an SD
machine parameters in the machine will be ・Preparation for placement, checking of
rewritten. pickup positions and setting of nozzles
●You are recommended to save the current
data beforehand just in case. 2. Checking and ・Selection of MCDATA
reflection of (Production program) *2)
(→[Operating Procedure] P.2-3-4) placement *1) ・Placement
(Offset ・Checking and reflection of placement
registration) results *3) *4) *5)
3.Checking of ・Selection of MCDATA (Production

placement result program)*2)
・Placement
・Checking of placement results *3) *4) *5)
*1) (→ P.12-19-1-2 ‘■Order of verification’)

*2) (→ P.12-19-1-1 ‘■MCDATA type’)
*3) (→ P.12-19-1-2 ‘■Target value for accuracy verification’)
*4) (→ P.12-19-1-1 ‘■Reflection of verification data’)
*5) Check both lanes 1 and 2.
NPM-D3 12-19-1-3 EJM6DE-MB-12M-01

Head types, detailed task, and parts
●The work to do varies according to the installed head pattern.

●The each-angle offset will be reflected on Chip, Micro and General-purpose.
Chip: 1005JIG chip (reflected on light weight 16-/12-/8-nozzle head placement accuracy)
Micro: Offset dedicated to 0402 components (reflected on light weight 16-/12-/8-nozzle head placement
accuracy) *1)(common to 03015 components)
General-purpose: JIG_BGA (reflected on 2-/8-nozzle head support components (□12mm or larger))
■Combination of nozzle, component and placement head used for each head operation
General-
Chip Micro
Head purpose
1005Jig chip 0402R 03015R *1) JIG_BGA
Light weight16- 230CS: 203ZS/256CS:
276S: 16 nozzles *1) ---
nozzle head 16 nozzles 16 nozzles
230CS: 203ZS/256CS:
12-nozzle head --- ---
12 nozzles 12 nozzles
Calibration
230CS: 203Z/256C: 184:
8-nozzle head ---
8 nozzles 8 nozzles 2 nozzles
1005:
2-nozzle head --- --- ---
2 nozzles
*1) 03015 placement (option) is supported by the light weight 16-nozzle head.
The each-angle offset for 03015 components is acquired by 0402R (nozzle: 203ZS/256CS) and placement
accuracy is confirmed by 03015R (nozzle: 276S).
■Chip accuracy
●Our specified jig parts(1005Jig chip) are used for the placement check for chip parts.
● The jig parts are made of a ceramic material (as an actual component) that is specially plated.
●They have great shape stabilities and are used for acquiring the each-angle offset accurately.
Jig part Model No. ERJJ02AAAAAV

Part shape 1.0 mm × to 0.5 mm
Thickness 0.14 mm
● It is indispensable to check the accuracy by the jig parts.

●When 0402 components are placed, the 0402 dedicated each-angle offset will be used preferentially.
(common to 03015)
●When 0402 components are placed, it is recommended to register the each-angle offset and verify
placement accuracy by 0402R.
●When placement accuracy of 03015 components are verified, it is recommended to use 03015R
(nozzle 276S).
■ General-purpose accuracy
● The dedicated JIG_BGA is used.
● The metal plate where a BGA shape pattern is formed correctly is fixed in a resin case.
● The accuracy is measured by placing each case.
JIG_BGA Model No. N610087876AA
NPM-D3 12-19-1-4 EJM6DE-MB-12M-01

Maintenance
Accuracy Overview 3
12-19-1 verifica-
MCDATA (Production program)

●There are four head types: Light weight 16-nozzle, 12-nozzle, 8-nozzle, and 2-nozzle.
●The supply section is on the front: feeder only, on the rear: feeder (F), or single tray (T) or twin tray (TT).
●In the head pattern, for example, 8-8F shows the front: 8 nozzles, the rear: 8 nozzles, feeder-supply
section.
Likewise, 2-2T shows the front: 2 nozzles, the rear: 2 nozzles, tray-supply section.
●For the machine equipped with the light weight 16-nozzle head, the 12-nozzle head, and the 8-nozzle head,
both heads are used for efficiency.
●Combinations other than listed here include combined use with ‘without head’ and a dispensing or
inspection head.
The table below is the major configuration of heads and supply sections.
(example of major configuration) LW16: Light weight 16-nozzle head
○ : Placing by front and rear heads F: Tape feeder specifications
Head designation: Placing by designated head only T: Tray feeder specifications
For 03015
For ±0.025 mm
Offset Chip Micro General-purpose placement
(option)
(option)*1)
Component to
1005Jig chip 0402R JIG_BGA 1005Jig chip 03015R
use
Head pattern Front Rear Front Rear Front Rear Front Rear Front Rear
LW16-LW16F   --- ---  
LW16-12F   --- --- LW16 --- LW16 ---
LW16-8F   --- 8 LW16 --- LW16 ---
LW16-2F LW16 --- LW16 --- --- 2 LW16 --- LW16 ---
LW16-8T LW16 --- LW16 --- --- 8 LW16 --- LW16 ---
LW16-2T LW16 --- LW16 --- --- 2 LW16 --- LW16 ---
12-12F   --- --- --- --- --- ---
12-8F   --- 8 --- --- --- ---
8-8F   8 8 --- --- --- ---
12-2F 12 --- 12 --- --- 2 --- --- --- ---
8-2F 8 --- 8 --- 8 2 --- --- --- ---
2-2F --- --- --- --- 2 2 --- --- --- ---
12-2T 12 --- 12 --- --- 2 --- --- --- ---
8-2T 8 --- 8 --- 8 2 --- --- --- ---
2-2T --- --- --- --- 2 2 --- --- --- ---
12-8T 12 --- 12 --- --- 8 --- --- --- ---
8-8T 8 --- 8 --- 8 8 --- --- --- ---
*1) Use micro (0402R) MCDATA for registering each-position-angle offset for 03015 component.
NOTICE
The MCDATA (Production program) is contained in the DVD-ROM (Machine system /Recognition / LNB
system disk) that comes with the machine.
Refer to the MCDATA sheet included in the DVD-ROM, select the target MCDATA according to the machine
type. Copy it to an SD card once and load it to the machine.
An SD card should be prepared by the customer.
If you overwrite the MCDATA downloaded to the machine to the SD card, the MCDATA in the SD card will not
be functioned. If you accidentally overwrite to the SD card, copy the data from DVD-ROM again.
If you must perform accuracy verification by the configuration which is not in the MCDATA list such as head
change, please contact us.
NPM-D3 12-19-1-5 EJM6DE-MB-12M-01
Maintenance
Accuracy Overview 4
12-19-1 verifica-
tion (Inspection head)
This section describes the procedures for measuring the inspection head accuracy and updating the
inspection camera offset by using the measured result. The plane correction jig is used for
measurement.
●Because the plane correction jig is inserted and taken out from the upstream process, adjust the
width of the upstream transfer conveyor to that of the plane correction jig.
Brief description of process

The dedicated MCDATA (production
■Working process
program) is used for inspection head 1.Production ・Saving calibration DATA (DVD-ROM) to an
accuracy verification and registering the preparation SD
inspection camera offset. When the ・Setting up the plane correction jig
inspection camera offset is reflected,
machine parameters in the machine will
be rewritten. 2.Check and ・Selection of MCDATA (Production program)
*2)
reflection of
●You are recommended to save the measurement 1) ・Measurement
・Checking and reflection of placement results
current data beforehand just in case. (offset registration) *3) *4) *5)
(→[Operating procedure] P.2-3-4)
3.Checking ・Selection of MCDATA (Production program)*2)
・Measurement
Calibration
measurement
accuracy ・Checking of measurement results *3) *4) *5)
*2) (→ P.12-19-1-1 ‘■MCDATA type’)
*5) Check both lanes 1 / 2.
MCDATA (production program)

●There are two inspection head types: 18 μm and 9 μm.
● In the head pattern, for example, 9I-8F shows the front: 9 μm inspection head, the rear: 8- nozzle head,
and the tape feeder supply section.
Likewise, 18I-2T shows the front: 18 μm inspection head, the rear: 2- nozzle head, and the single tray
feeder supply section.
The table below is the major configuration of heads and supply sections
Head pattern
LW16: Light weight 16-nozzle head
9I-LW16F 18I-LW16F F: Tape feeder specifications
9I-12F 18I-12F T: Tray feeder specifications
9I-8F 18I-8F
9I-2F 18I-2F
9I-8T 18I-8T
9I-2T 18I-2T
NOTICE
The MCDATA (Production program) is contained in the DVD-ROM (Machine system /
Recognition / LNB system disk) that comes with the machine.
Refer to the MCDATA sheet included in the DVD-ROM, select the target MCDATA according to
the machine type. Copy it to an SD card once and load it to the machine.
NPM-D3 12-19-1-6 EJM6DE-MB-12M-01
Maintenance
Accuracy Overview 5
12-19-1 verifica-
tion (dispensing head)
Describes the accuracy measurement procedure of the dispensing head.
Brief description of process

The dedicated MCDATA (production ■Working process
program) is used for dispensing head
1.Production ・Saving calibration DATA (DVD-ROM) to
accuracy verification.
preparation an SD
・Preparation for dispensing
2.Check and ・Selection of MCDATA (Production program)

*2)
reflection of
dispensing1) ・Dispensing
(offset registration) ・Checking and reflection of dispensing results
*3) *4) *5)
3.Checking ・Selection of MCDATA (Production program)

*2)
dispensing
accuracy ・Dispensing
・Checking of dispensing results *3) *4) *5)
*2) (→ P.12-19-1-1 ‘■MCDATA type’)
*5) Check both lanes 1 / 2.
MCDATA (production program)

●In the head pattern, for example, DIS-8F shows the front: Dispensing head, the rear: 8-nozzle head, and
the tape feeder supply section.
Likewise, DIS-2T shows the front: Dispensing head, the rear: 2- nozzle head, and the single tray feeder
supply section.
The table below is the major configuration of heads and supply sections
Head pattern
LW16: Light weight 16-nozzle head
DIS-LW16F LW16-DIS F: Tape feeder specifications
DIS-12F 12-DIS T: Tray feeder specifications
DIS-8F 8-DIS
DIS-8T 2-DIS
DIS-2F —
DIS-2T —
NOTICE
The MCDATA (Production program) is contained in the DVD-ROM (Machine system /
Recognition / LNB system disk) that comes with the machine.
Refer to the MCDATA sheet included in the DVD-ROM, select the target MCDATA according to
the machine type. Copy it to an SD card once and load it to the machine.
NPM-D3 12-19-1-7 EJM6DE-MB-12M-01

Calibration
NPM-D3 12-19-1-8 EJM6DE-MB-12M-01

Maintenance
Accuracy Detailed process 1
12-19-2 verifica-
Production preparation 1 (Loading MCDATA: Production program)
Set the SD card which MCDATA

1 has been copied
3 Choose MCDATA
(→ P.12-19-1-1 ‘■MCDATA type’)
4 Load MCDATA
●Load the data as same way as the
3 2 normal production data.
NPM-D3 12-19-2-1 EJM6DE-MB-12M-01

Production preparation 2 (preparation for verification material )
1 Set the nozzles 2 Place components

to the nozzle
holders ■For chip
Set the jig part to the table feeder and
(This task is the same as install it to the No.7 slot.
the normal production ●If using the front/rear beams for
operation) placing , set the jig chip to each side.
●You should perform teaching of the To 3
pockets in the tape feeder where
appropriate.
(This task is the same as the normal
production operation)
Calibration
■When JIG_BGA, supply stage is put on the feeder cart
Remove JIG_BGA (N610087876AA) from the tray and set it to the supply stage (N610074266AA).
●Install it in a line to prevent JIG_BGA from slanting.
●The supply stage consisting of two stages can be installed with 16 JIG_BGAs x 2 stages.
First stage
Second stage
■ When JIG_BGA is put on the tray feeder

①Install components together with the tray (storage
aluminum case) to the tray pallet.
②Set a tray pallet to slot 1 on the tape feeder.
(This task is the same as the normal production operation)
●Right-align and set the tray (storage aluminum case) in the
back as seen from the rear.
●Pay attention to the installation orientation.
(JIG_BGA itself has no particular orientation. )
Tray pallet Tray (storage aluminum case)
NPM-D3 12-19-2-2 EJM6DE-MB-12M-01

Maintenance
12-19-2 verifica-
3 Prepare the glass PCB
①Prepare a glass PCB set (N610108752AA) for placement accuracy check.

(Glass PCB, background plate and mirror are included)
②Prepare the background based on a component to verify its accuracy.
Part Background
JIG_BGA Black sponge
(Set the background plate)
Jig part: ERJJ02AAAAAV, 0402R, Insert a mirror between the glass and the
etc. background plate.
(See the manual included in the glass PCB set)
③Affix the double-faced tape onto the glass PCB.

●Affix the tape to the area where components are placed (Inside the dotted line in the picture
below is a rough area)
●Keep away from recognition marks on the both edges of the glass.
●Affix the tape with no air bubbles.
Glass PCB after jig parts are placed Glass PCB after JIG_BGA are placed
Placement Jig part Mirror Placement JIG_BGA Background plate

area area (black sponge)
NPM-D3 12-19-2-3 EJM6DE-MB-12M-01

Checking and reflection of placement (placement)
1 2 3
(First layer) (Second layer) ENABLING
Calibration
6 5 Load glass PCB 4 Confirm the
message
●Production starts as the
glass PCB is loaded
upon completion of
production preparation.
NOTICE ●To use accuracy verification

MCDATA:
If the machine is coupled to
another machine, adjust the PCB (→ P.12-19-1-1 ‘■Reflection
width of the adjacent machine to of verification data’)
216 mm, and load the PCB into
the upstream machine.
Place parts NOTICE

7 8 Do not press the STOP button
while accuracy verification is
●Automatically mounts carried out.
parts. You cannot restart operation in
(After placed, the head the middle of accuracy
camera starts measuring verification.
the placement position)
●The head camera screen

appears and you can view
the part being measured.
NPM-D3 12-19-2-4 EJM6DE-MB-12M-01

Maintenance Accuracy Detailed process 3
12-19-2 verifica-
Checking and reflection of placement (checking placement results)

2
1 Upon completion of placement,
2 +
(Automatic run ends)

■When you do not end
5 Switch it with
(→ P.12-19-1-2 ‘■Target value for
accuracy verification’)
3 5
NPM-D3 12-19-2-5 EJM6DE-MB-12M-01

7 6
6 Choose a table
(Displays the accuracy of the front and the
rear individually or the total accuracy)
●If the measurement result Cpk is
lower than the prescribed value,
Angle Offset is reflected.
■To reflect mount offset
Calibration
A
A Cpk
●Cpk prescribed values per component
8 Choose a nozzle to display
(Offset per nozzle is displayed)
→See P.9-1-1 [Basic performance] in
[Operating procedure]
9 Choose a table to display
8 10 9
10 Choose a placed part
●Displayed based on the part type.
■To reflect the verification data
11
●Confirm the message
B 11 To use accuracy verification MCDATA:

(→ P.12-19-1-1 ‘■Reflection of verification
B X[mm], Y[mm], θ[°]

Offset per nozzle is displayed
data’)
■ For
To 12
■ For other than
To 13
NPM-D3 12-19-2-6 EJM6DE-MB-12M-01
Maintenance
12-19-2 verifica-
Checking the placement result (reflection of verification data, offset registration)

●For a part up to the size of the 0402
chip
12
●For a part larger in size than the
0402 chip
●Regardless of the table

13 selected for data display
・All heads
・Nozzle offset
are updated.
(The data is reflected and machine
parameters are updated)
NOTE
●It can be replaced so that you can check the placement accuracy.
In doing so, please do [Checking the placement result] on P.12-19-2-8.
NPM-D3 12-19-2-7 EJM6DE-MB-12M-01

Checking of placement result
Verifies the results registered as offsets in “Checking and reflection of placement.” The procedure is the
same as the one used in “Checking and reflection of placement.”
Though not necessarily required, this procedure will be used as a guideline for measuring the level of
accuracy of the machine.
●As for MCDATA (production program), use accuracy verification MCDATA.
(→ P.12-19-1-1 ’■MCDATA type’)
●Accuracy verification MCDATA is intended for accuracy verification use, so refrain from reflecting in it the
each-position-angle offsets obtained from measurement results.
(→ P.12-19-1-1 ‘■Reflection of verification data’)
The following causes are cited as possible causes when no improvements are seen in accuracy verification
results.
Cause Troubleshooting
Check for any flaws or foreign bodies on the
The target components are deteriorated
surface of JIG_BGA.
Calibration
The correct jig parts are not used. Check the jig parts.
Actual parts 1005C are used. Check the jig parts.
The head shaft is damaged Check for unsmooth sliding of the shaft.
The illumination of the multi-recognition
Execute the lamp-value illumination calibration.
camera is wrong.
●If you perform above measures, but the accuracy verification result is not improved or you find any trouble
on the head shaft, please contact us.
NPM-D3 12-19-2-8 EJM6DE-MB-12M-01

12-19-2 verifica-
tion (inspection head)

1 has been copied
3 Choose MCDATA
(→ P.12-19-1-1 ‘■MCDATA type’)
4 Load MCDATA
NPM-D3 12-19-2-9 EJM6DE-MB-12M-01

1 +
The width of the transfer conveyor is

adjusted to that of the plane correction
jig.
2 Servo switch OFF
Insert the plane correction jig

3
Calibration
from the upstream process
1
5 Set the plane correction jig

①Set the jig in each lane (1 and 2) so
that its right end face is aligned with the
reference mark on the forward rail of
each lane.
(Common to both left → right flow and
right → left flow.)
Plane
correction
Reference jig
mark (b)
Reference
Plane correction jig
mark (a)
②Set the reference mark (b) on the
reference side of the rail.
③Press the jig against the reference rail.
Reference mark (a)

Plane correction
7 Servo switch ON
jig’s edge
NPM-D3 12-19-2-10 EJM6DE-MB-12M-01

12-19-2 verifica-
Checking and reflection of measurement (measurement)
1 2 3
Measure the
4 plane correction 4 Confirm the
message
jig
●Measure the jig in
automatic operation. After
the measurement ends
and the its operation stops,
end the automatic ●To use accuracy
operation verification MCDATA:
(→ P.12-19-1-1 ‘■Reflection
of verification data’)
NOTICE
Do not press the STOP button while accuracy verification is carried out.
You cannot restart operation in the middle of accuracy verification.
NPM-D3 12-19-2-11 EJM6DE-MB-12M-01

Checking and reflection of measurement (checking of the measurement result)
3 Switch it with
●9μm 0.010mm
18μm 0.020mm
Calibration
1 3
5 4
4 Choose a table of the

inspection head
(Front or rear (individual) or total
accuracy is displayed.)
● If the measurement result Cpk is lower than
the prescribed value, reflect the verification
data on the inspection camera offset.
A
A Cpk
●Cpk prescribed value per component
→See P.6-1-1[Basic performance] in [Operating procedure]
NPM-D3 12-19-2-12 EJM6DE-MB-12M-01

12-19-2 verifica-
Checking the measurement result (reflection of the verification data)
(The data is reflected and the machine

6 parameter is updated)
NOTE
●You can confirm the measurement accuracy result by re-measurement.
In that case, perform [Checking of measurement result] (→P.12-19-2-14).
NPM-D3 12-19-2-13 EJM6DE-MB-12M-01

Checking of measurement result

(→ P.12-19-1-1 ‘■MCDATA type’)
results.
The plane correction jig is Check for any flaws or foreign bodies on the
Calibration
contaminated. surface of the jig.
Check for any flaws or foreign bodies on the

surface of the jig.
Calibration jig is contaminated.
If so, clean the surface with the provided brush and be careful not to
damage.
Machine parameters of the

inspection Execute calibration for the inspection head.
head are wrong.
NPM-D3 12-19-2-14 EJM6DE-MB-12M-01

12-19-2 verifica-

1 has been copied
3 Choose MCDATA
(→ P.12-19-1-1 ‘■MCDATA type’)
4 Load MCDATA
NPM-D3 12-19-2-15 EJM6DE-MB-12M-01

Production preparation 2 (preparation for verification material 2)
1 Prepare a syringe and a screw unit
(→See [Operating
procedure] P.3-4)
●Set the nozzle for

calibration on the screw
unit.
Calibration
2 Prepare the dispensing accuracy
check board (N610114660AA)
●Wipe the board surface
using a cloth soaked in
ethanol, and spray the
anti-static agent.
WARNING
NPM-D3 12-19-2-16 EJM6DE-MB-12M-01

12-19-2 verifica-
Dispending check and reflection (dispending)
1 2 3
6 5 Load a PCB 4 Confirm the

message
●Production starts after the
PCB is loaded upon
completion of production
preparation.
●To use accuracy
verification MCDATA:
(→ P.12-19-1-1 ‘■Reflection
of verification data’)
7 NOTICE
Do not press the STOP button while accuracy verification is carried out.
You cannot restart operation in the middle of accuracy verification.
NPM-D3 12-19-2-17 EJM6DE-MB-12M-01

Checking and reflection of dispensing (checking dispensing results)
2
1 After dispensing completion
2 +
(Automatic operation is complete)
Calibration
4 5
5 Choose a table
(Front or rear (individual) or total
accuracy is displayed.)
NPM-D3 12-19-2-18 EJM6DE-MB-12M-01

12-19-2 verifica-
Checking and reflection of dispensing (checking dispensing results)

7
6 Dispensing accuracy is
displayed
Switches a display between XY (the

dispensing position accuracy) and
dispensing area (variations in
dispensing)
Switches the display for accuracy among

pos1, pos2, and all heads.
Displays accuracy according to

dispensing angles.
6 A
A Cpk
●Cpk prescribed value per component Switches a target of XY (the
→See P.6-1-1[Basic performance] in dispensing position accuracy).
[Operating procedure]
●If the measurement result Cpk is lower
than the defined value, the verification
data is reflected to the placement
position offset (dispensing).
NPM-D3 12-19-2-19 EJM6DE-MB-12M-01

Checking the dispensing result (reflection of the verification data)
(The data is reflected and the machine

8 parameter is updated)
NOTE
●You can confirm the measurement accuracy result by re-measurement.
In that case, perform [Checking of dispensing accuracy] below.
Calibration
Checking of dispensing accuracy

(→ P.12-19-1-1 ‘■MCDATA type’)
results.
A different type of adhesive is applied Check the type of adhesive
Check the type of nozzle.

A calibration nozzle is not used
Calibration nozzle : No.7202
A head shaft is damaged Check for unsmooth sliding of the shaft
The illumination of a head camera is wrong Execute the lamp-value illumination calibration
Machine parameters of a dispensing head

Execute calibration for the dispensing head
are wrong
The area value of the accuracy verification

Execute the lamp-value illumination calibration
result is too large
NPM-D3 12-19-2-20 EJM6DE-MB-12M-01

NPM-D3 12-19-2-21 EJM6DE-MB-12M-01
13 Installation
Maintenance
Before installation
13-1
Checking installation location
Flat concrete Condensation

floor free environment
●Withstand load of the ●Temperature: 10 to 35℃
installation place: ●Humidity: 25 to 75 %RH
4903 N/m2 or higher
Adequate space
for maintenance
work
Flat place
●PCB transfer height: 900 to Draw a layout
920mm (Both single and line
connection)
baseline on the
floor
● [Outside dimensions] (→[Operating procedure] P.9-1-3), [Altitude] (→[Operating procedure] P.9-1-1)
Check primary power supply and air source specifications

■Primary power supply ■Air source
Normal power 3-phase AC 200 ±10 V/ 220 ●Use clean air provided by an air dryer.
supply ±10 V ●Air pressure: 0.5 to 0.8 MPa
380/400/420/480 ±20 V After air is supplied, adjust the air pressure to 0.5
to 0.55 MPa with the regulator.
Frequency 50 / 60 Hz ±5%
●Amount of air supply: 100 L/min(A.N.R)
Rated capacity 2.7 kVA ●Hose connection inlet size: 3/8 inch
●Supply from power equipment managed by the plant.
(Public low-voltage power distribution system: Do not
connect directly to the commercial power supply)

Maintenance
Transportation
13-2
Handle the machine with extreme care when transporting.
The feeder cart and the tray feeder, if connected to the main body, should be removed before transportation.
Using a forklift or a pallet truck

Tool used: 65 mm spanner (2 pcs)
●Insert the forks from the side

■Fork insertion position
Pallet truck or forklift
MASS:1 680 kg
CENTER
Forks Fork insertion position

1 Keep turning the Adjustment bolt’s adjustment bolt until
the bottom of the machine is raised higher than the forks.
Insert the forks under the machine from the right side Lock nut
Installation
2
(facing the front of the machine). Adjustment bolt
●Align the center of two forks to ▼ shown on the sticker.
3 Raise the forks and lift the machine.
4 Convey the machine to the destination and set it down.
Using a crane
A specialized lifting jig is needed.
ATTENTION
●When lifting the machine with one wire rope one each side, use
the wire rope with the breaking load of 30 kN or more.
1188 mm
●Eyebolts should be securely screwed all the way in.
●Store eyebolts after transport.
Specialized lifting jig
Wire rope
Eye bolts
(four)

Maintenance
Installation 1
13-3
Tool used: Convex, Allen wrench (3 mm), metal ruler, Level gauge, 46 mm spanners (2 pcs)
1 Install
Temporarily locate the machine along the baseline drawn on the floor and adjust the installation
position.
●Adjust the height and facing of the machine to guarantee a smooth PCB transfer between the
machine and adjacent equipment in a line.
●Keep a 5 to 10 mm space between the machine and adjacent equipment.
●If running a vent under the machine, keep a 40 mm or more space between the machine and
the vent.
●The each figure shows the minimum space . (All dimensions in mm)
NOTICE
●Regarding installation, follow the instructions of a specialist.
●Regarding relocation, contact us, please.
■Installation drawing
●Front side : Feeder cart
●Rear side : Tray feeder *1) For feeder cart
678 *1)
2205 *1)
Tray feeder
857
(Option)
2225
1025
4249 *1)
PCB transfer
reference
686
4269
PCB transfer
reference
864
2044
Feeder cart
837
(Option)
Front side

2 Check the working area
■For feeder cart (option)
Front side
To 3
Working area 837
Installation
1652
■For tray feeder (option) *1) For feeder cart
Rear side
857
Working area
1981 *1)1652

Maintenance
Installation 2
13-3
3 Detach fixing brackets (red color)

●Store the detached brackets.
●Bracket: 6 locations.
●Only 2-nozzle head has a separate stopper
(rubber) .Remove and keep it.
X-axis fixing bracket
Y-axis fixing bracket
■For 2-nozzle head
Y-axis roller-side fixing

bracket
Separate transport stopper for

2-nozzle head

4 Level the machine
1 Place level gauges as shown in 2 Level the machine with the 3 Secure the adjustment
the right figure. adjustment bolts. bolts with the lock nuts.
●Level: 4 locations ●The bubble should stay
centered or within 1
division. (0.02 mm/m)
●4 adjustment bolts
To 5
PCB transfer height

900 to 920 mm
Installation
Front side Lock nut
Level gauge installation sites Adjustment bolt

Adjustment bolts
■About PCB transfer height

●The standard PCB transfer height of NPM-D3 is from 900 to 920mm.
●Depending on your plant floor conditions, the PCB transfer heights of your production-line machines
can vary as shown in the figure below, in which feeder carts may not be connected normally to
machines #2 and #15.
●If the PCB transfer heights of all your production-line NPM-D3s cannot be 900 to 920mm, please
consult our sales representative or customer service in advance.
#1 #2 #3 #10 #18
PCB
transfer
height
900 mm 885 mm 920 mm 940 mm
Floor NG
OK OK
NG
NOTICE
You are recommended to check the level every six months after installation.

Maintenance
Installation 3
13-3
5 Adjust the angle of the signal tower

1 Loosen the adjustment bolt 2 Adjust the angle and tighten the adjustment bolt.
with Allen wrench (3 mm). ●Recommended tightening torque: 3.0N・m
NOTICE
Signal tower:
horizontally installed
Adjustment bolt
before shipment

Maintenance Main Checking voltages of the
13-4-1 primary power supply and
power
connec-
tion the machine
Ensure that the voltage setting of the machine is the same as that of the plant’s primary power supply.
●Before shipment, the voltage setting of the machine is configured as previously arranged with you.
■Wiring diagrams of transformer power

Check the voltage of the transformer
1 power supply taps(Ex. for AC 200V)
tap (abstract)
●Check the taps to which L10 cables are connected.

U：
Primary power voltage (factory side)

Front side Transformer First phase
V：
Second phase
W：
Third phase
Grounding
earth
Transformer power tap
2 Check the voltage indicated on the supply
Installation
voltage label
●Before using 290 V AC or
higher (any taps equal to or
higher than 380 V AC), ensure
that the voltage between a
ground and each phase is 290
V AC or lower and that star
connection is used on the
feeding side, with the N
(neutral) terminal connected to
the ground.
Front side
ATTENTION
●Before changing the primary input tap, make sure that the voltage after the tap change is the
same as the plant’s primary power-supply voltage. If not, the main transformer could generate
heat that causes the machine to malfunction.
●Separately use the breaker on the plant side. Before starting electrical construction, check the
specification for the rated power consumption and consult an electrical contractor. The shared
use of the breaker with other equipment may cause a fire due to heat generation.
●Even with the main power turned OFF, power is supplied up to the primary power line. Be careful
during maintenance work.
WARNING
●Even with the main power turned OFF, power is supplied up to the primary power line. Be careful
during maintenance work.
The power supply and the air source should be connected to the
machine at the end of installation

Connection of the main
Maintenance Main
13-4-2
power
connec-
tion
power supply
Tool used: Phillips screwdriver (No.2), special driver (provided)
Remove the front

1 Prepare a cable and process terminals 2 right side cover
1 Prepare four-core cable. 2 Process the terminals to
●Cross-section area: be connected to the
3.5 to 5.5 mm2 machine.
●Recommended sleeve
terminals
・Manufacturer:
PHOENIX CONTACT
・Type: 2
3.5-4.0 mm2 Al4-12GY
5.5-6.0 mm Al6-12YE
Special driver (provided)
5 Insert the cable

Insert the tip of
●Connect the PE wire (green/yellow)
first and then connect the terminals
■Main power
cable all the way to in the order of L1→L2→L3.
terminal
the end.
L1 ●Insert the sleeve terminals until
L2 their insulating coatings go inside
L3 the terminal block.
PE
L1 L2 L3 PE
Confirm secured
6 insertions
1 Remove the special driver.
(The fixing bracket inside the cable insertion
Check the tension slot closes)
2 Pull on the cable with a force of 50 N and
ensure that it is firmly-secured.
NPM-D3 13-4-2-1 EJM6DE-MB-13M-01

3 Pass the cable through cable clamps A and B, in that order
●Recommended cable external dimensions:
Cable 13.5 to 18mm
clamp B ●If you have trouble passing the cable through
Cable
Cable clamp A, loosen the clamp by turning it
clamp A
counterclockwise.
●If you have trouble passing the cable through
Cable clamp B, pass the cable after removing the
mounting bolt and then bolt it again.
1 After passing the cable through Cable clamp A,
Recommended cable secure it by turning the clamp clockwise.
external dimensions 2 Pull on the cable with a force of 100 N and
ensure that the cable is firmly-secured.
4 Insert the special driver
Cable insertion slot
Installation
Special driver ●Insert the special driver deep enough to
open the fixing bracket inside the cable
insertion slot.
●Make sure that the PE wire on the plant

side is connected to ground.
Check the following conditions before

7 turning on the power
Ordinary use 3-phase AC 200/220 ±10 V

power source 380/400/420/480 ±20 V
Frequency 50/60 Hz ±5 %
Rating capacity 2.7 kVA
The primary power should be supplied from power-supply

facilities controlled inside your plant, rather than establishing
a direct connection with the public low-voltage power
distribution system (commercial power).
NPM-D3 13-4-2-2 EJM6DE-MB-13M-01

Maintenance Main Adjusting voltages of the
primary power supply and
13-4-3
power
connec-
tion the machine
Adjust the difference in voltage between the primary power supply and the machine, if any.
Tool used: Phillips screwdriver (No.2), special driver (provided)
Change the voltage of the primary power Turn OFF the

1 supply 2 power and lock
(The primary power supply voltage of the transformer can the machine
be changed to any of the following voltages)
●Adjust it to the voltage of power supply.
1. 480 V
2. 420 V
4. 380 V
5. 220 V
4
3. 400 V 6. 200 V
●Before using 290 V AC or higher (any tap equal to or
higher than 380 V AC), ensure that the voltage between
a ground and each phase is 290 V AC or lower and that OFF
star connection is used on the feeding side, with the N
(neutral) terminal connected to the ground.
Connect U, V, and W to the same voltage taps ■Wiring diagrams of transformer power
5 (Ex. for AC400V to 200V) tap (abstract)
Change to
●Use the attached special driver to Transformer
connect each cable.
Then, insert the ferrules fully.
Transformer power tap
Attach the cover, and relabel the numerical section of the supply voltage
6 label
●The label indicates the power

supply voltage supplied to the
machine.
When changing the power supply
voltage, purchase a new label and
relabel it.
In that case, align ▼ with the
numeric value on the supply voltage
label that corresponds to the power
Numerical section of the supply voltage after the change.
supply voltage label
NPM-D3 13-4-3-1 EJM6DE-MB-13M-01

Easy ways to check power supply grounding
(tester confirmation)
Change the machine voltage.
e.g., Changing from 400 V AC to ■If 5 wires of L1, L2, L3, N and PE are being drawn out
200 V AC (= star connection) → Measure the voltage between N and
PE
Check the
3 plant supply
●If the neutral wire is grounded
The value is stable in the Connectable at 290 V AC or
voltage approximate range of 0 to a higher
few volts.
●If the neutral wire is not grounded
The value is unstable Not connectable at 290 V AC
(indicates several tens of or higher
volts)
e.g.) Grounded star connection

Remove the front (*1) The neutral wire (N) is not used for the machine. Leave
4 cover of the the cable unconnected to the machine and insulate its
Installation
machine end to keep it from coming in contact with a terminal and
others.
■If 4 wires of L1, L2, L3 and PE are being drawn out, it
can be either star connection or delta connection.
(Usually one phase is grounded on delta connection)
Measure and compare the phase to phase voltage (V0)
and the phase to PE voltage (V).
●If V = V0 and V of single phase is 0 V

One phase is grounded on
delta connection Not connectable at 290 V AC or higher
●If stable at " V0 / Square root of 3."
●Eight screws The neutral wire is grounded
on star connection Connectable at 290 V AC or higher
●If the value is not stable
No ground contact
(Unknown connection type ) Not connectable at 290 V AC or higher
Example 1: Example 2:
Delta connection grounded Star connection not grounded
NPM-D3 13-4-3-2 EJM6DE-MB-13M-01
Maintenance
Connection of air source
13-5 and power supply
Connecting air source

Tool used: Phillips screwdriver (No. 2), Allen wrench (3 mm)
Remove the
1 cover 3 Supply air
●Use an air dryer and always supply clean air.
●Air pressure: 0.5 to 0.8 MPa

(The size of the inlet for connecting the hose is 3/8)
●After supplying air, adjust the air pressure to 0.5 to

0.55 MPa with the regulator (→P.4-1-1)
●Air supply rate: 100 L/min (A.N.R.)
2 Connect the compressed air piping
Regulator
Rear side
Compressed air piping

(Primary air supply side)

Checking the power connection
An incorrect main power connection may reverse and damage the vacuum pump. Check to see if it is
correctly connected.
Remove the front Check that the following three voltages are
1 right side cover 2 the same as their respective voltage labels
Main power
terminals
L1 L2 L3 PE
Main
power
Checking for voltage terminals
Check the between L1 and L2
3
Installation
vacuum state
●The system is designed
Main
to check the phase of power
the vacuum-pump motor terminals
automatically as the L1 L2 L3 PE L1 L2 L3 PE
power is turned on.
●If an error message is
displayed, confirm the
error information and
check if each phase of
the primary power Checking for voltage Checking for voltage
source is connected. between L2 and L3 between L1 and L3
WARNING
Connect the power supply and the air source to the machine at
the end of installation after checking for the voltage and
connections

Maintenance Peripher-
Line configuration
13-6-1
al device
connec-
tion
To install the NPM-D3 (including the line and stand-alone configurations), the unit with the line server and
extension conveyor functions needs to be installed at both ends of the NPM-D3 line.
Line configuration including NPM-D3s only

■When 15 machines or less are coupled
NPM-D3 NPM-D3 NPM-D3 NPM-D3

1 2 14 15
Conveyor L1) Conveyor R

N-CONL NM-EJK3B N-CONR NM-EJK4B
■When 16 to 30 machines are coupled

1 2 29 30
Conveyor L1) Conveyor R2)

N-CONL NM-EJK3B N-CONR NM-EJK4B
1) The optional units (FA computer, HUB unit, Power supply unit ) are required.
2) The optional units (HUB unit, Power supply unit ) are required.
WARNING
The power supply and the air source must be connected to the
machine after installation of peripheral equipment
(Risk of electric shock or injury)
NPM-D3 13-6-1-1 EJM6DE-MB-13M-01

Line configuration including NPM-D3s and non-NPM-D3
■When 15 machines or less are coupled
Other
than
1 7 8 15
NPM-D3
Conveyor L1) Conveyor R Conveyor L Conveyor R

N-CONL N-CONR N-CONL N-CONR
NM-EJK3B NM-EJK4B NM-EJK3B NM-EJK4B
■When 16 to 30 machines are coupled
Installation
Other
than
1 15 16 30
NPM-D3
Conveyor L1) Conveyor R Conveyor L Conveyor R)

N-CONL N-CONR N-CONL N-CONR
NM-EJK3B NM-EJK4B NM-EJK3B NM-EJK4B
This is a sample line configuration, so it can vary depending on your line configuration and
the position of in-line non-NPM-D3.
For details, please contact us.
1) The optional units (FA computer, HUB unit, Power supply unit ) are required.
2) The optional units (HUB unit, Power supply unit ) are required.
NPM-D3 13-6-1-2 EJM6DE-MB-13M-01

Line signal
13-6-2
al device
connec-
tion
specifications
Line signals
A single cable connection is established throughout a line, allowing one machine in line to signal it’s
connecting machine to transfer PCBs.
■PCB flow direction (From left to right) -XS
-XS -XS Connector connected to the next
Machine 1 -XP Machine 2 -XP Machine 3
process machine
Control Control Control
-XP
Box Box Box
Connector connected to the pre-
process machine
■PCB flow direction (From right to left)
-XP -XP
Machine 3 -XS Machine 2 -XS Machine 1
Control Control Control
Box Box Box
Arrangement of connector pins

SMEMA connectors are AMP-type connectors for easy connection.
■Connector pin arrangements as seen from the connection ports
Cable-side connector pin arrangement Machine-side connector pin arrangement
(Male pins) (Female pins)
2 2
3 1 1 3
7 4 4 7
8 8 11
11
12 14
14 12
13 13
■Part numbers on the cable and the machine sides
Connector Pin Strain relief

Cable side AMP 206044-1 AMP 66103-2 AMP206070-1
Machine side AMP 206043-1 AMP 66105-2 -
■ SMEMA connector location (one on either side of the rear of the machine)
SMEMA connector
NPM-D3 13-6-2-1 EJM6DE-MB-13M-01

Electrical-interface wiring diagram (SMEMA interface)
BOARD BOARD
MACHINE A MACHINE B
L1 MACHINE 1 1 L1 MACHINE 1 1 L1 MACHINE

READY READY READY
2 2 2 2
L1 BOARD 3 3 L1 BOARD 3 3 L1 BOARD

AVAILABLE AVAILABLE AVAILABLE
4 4 4 4
5 5 5 5
6 6 6 6
7 7 7 7
8 8 8 8
L2 MACHINE 9 9 L2 MACHINE 9 9 L2 MACHINE

READY READY READY
10 10 10 10
L2 BOARD 11 11 L2 BOARD 11 11 L2 BOARD

AVAILABLE AVAILABLE AVAILABLE
12 12 12 12
13 13 13 13
14 14 14 14
CONN.1 CONN.2 CONN.1 CONN.2
（－ＸＰ）（－ＸS）（－ＸＰ）（－ＸS）
Functional descriptions of electrical-interface connectors/cables
Installation
Connector/Cable Function Conditions Explanation
Device that receives the
Pair 1-21) Machine preparation
next PCB (lane 1(1))
Close2) 3)
Device that has a PCB to
Pair 3-41) PCB valid
send(lane 1(1))
Available only when devices
Pair 5-6 / 7-8 / 13- Inter-device state Input and output of the
are connected adjacent to each
14 ) output/input status between devices
other
Device that receives the
Pair 9-10 Machine preparation
next PCB (lane 2(4))
Close2) 3) Device that has a PCB to
Pair 11-12 PCB valid send
(lane 2(4))
1) As a minimum requirement, switch to 10 mA and 30 V DC.

2) Prevent the output LOW or Contact Close from exceeding 0.8 V DC under the condition of 10 mA.
3) When using the optical isolator, check for the appropriate polarity.
4) This is a signal used exclusively between NPM-D3 machines. You cannot input external signals.
●Existing devices that are not assembled based on this standard may need a fixed pin arrangement.
NPM-D3 13-6-2-2 EJM6DE-MB-13M-01

Connection of the
13-6-3
al device
connec-
tion
conveyor L 1
This section explains about the conveyor L in the case that the optional units (a FA computer, a HUB
unit, and a power supply unit) are installed.
Connecting the power cable
Check that the

1 Prepare a cable 2 power on the
●Supply power: factory side is
100 VAC to 240 VAC (Single phase, Three OFF
conductors), 320 VA
terminals
・Manufacturer:
PHOENIX CONTACT
・Type:
Al4-12GY
●Cable specifications:
Outside dimension: 9.0 mm to 11.5 mm
Connect the terminals of the power cable to the terminal block

5 using the included driver intended for this purpose
●Check that the PE line on the factory side is
Terminal grounded.
block ●Connect the PE line first and then L → N in this
order.
●For further information about connecting the
sleeve terminal and the terminal block (→P.13-
4-2)
6 Fasten the cable
①Fasten the cable stopper using the

bolt.
②Secure them by tightening the
Cable clamp Cable stopper cable clamps.
③Be sure to pull the cable at 100 N
to make sure that it is firmly
secured.
NPM-D3 13-6-3-1 EJM6DE-MB-13M-01

3 Ensure the main power supply switch is OFF, and remove the rear cover
Rear side
Main power supply
switch
●Bolts (7)
Pass the cable through cable clamp and cable stopper

4
Installation
①Remove the cable stopper.
②Loosen the cable clamp, and run
the power cable through the hole
underneath.
Cable clamp Cable stopper
NPM-D3 13-6-3-2 EJM6DE-MB-13M-01

Connection of the
13-6-3
al device
connec-
tion
conveyor L 2
Connection of the Ethernet cable and coupling cable (For one machine)
Rear side
Main power supply
switch
●Bolts (7)
Connect the Ethernet cable to the machine coupling section of

4 the adjacent NPM-D3
Rear side ●Run the Ethernet cable up through
a hole for the cable, via the
undersurface of the NPM-D3 main
body.
Ethernet cable
Hole for coupling cable
NPM-D3 13-6-3-3 EJM6DE-MB-13M-01

Connect the coupling cable, which is coming out of the
2 conveyor L with the coupling section of the adjacent NPM-D3
Rear side ●Run the coupling cable up through
body.
Coupling cable
3 Connect the supplied Ethernet cable to the HUB
Installation
●On the 16-port HUB side, connect
16-port HUB 10-port HUB
to one of the ports from 1 ch to 15
ch. Any port from 1 ch to 15 ch is
available.
NPM-D3 13-6-3-4 EJM6DE-MB-13M-01

Connection of the
13-6-3
al device
connec-
tion
conveyor L 3
Connection of the Ethernet cables (For several machines, up to 15 machines)
15 machines or less
Connect Ethernet cables to
1 the 16-port HUB and the
machine coupling section of
each NPM-D3
Conveyor L
●If 16 to 30 machines are coupled, the conveyor R (optional units (a HUB unit and a power
supply unit) installed) is required, and the conveyor R must be connected to the LNB
conveyor or the conveyor L via Ethernet.
16 to 30 machines
Conveyor L Conveyor R
NPM-D3 13-6-3-5 EJM6DE-MB-13M-01

Detaching and attaching the FA computer
An FA computer is incorporated in the conveyor L on the left end of the line. On the FA computer, the
LNB line server function is installed. When you relocate the conveyor L (for example, because of
changes in the layout), detach/attach the FA computer following the steps below, in order not to give a
severe shock to the computer.
Ensure the main power supply switch is OFF, and Detach the
1 open the front and side covers of the conveyor L 2 fixing bracket
Fixing bracket Sheet
Front side Side
●Bolts (7) ●Bolts (10) ●Bolts (2)
Install the FA computer from the front, and attach

3
Installation
the fixing bracket
●When installing the FA computer, the rubber
Fixing bracket feet on the underside of the FA computer
should be placed on the sheets.
FA computer
Rubber foot
Connect the power and Ethernet cables from Secure the

4 the side face 5 front and side
covers
● Align the Ethernet
cable mark No. to the
connection port No. of
FA computer.
Ethernet cable Power cable
NPM-D3 13-6-3-6 EJM6DE-MB-13M-01

Connection of the
13-6-4
al device
connec-
tion
conveyor R 1
This section explains about the conveyor R in the case that the optional units (a HUB unit, and a power
supply unit) are installed.
Connecting the power cable
Check that the

1 Prepare a cable 2 power on the
●Supply power: factory side is
100 VAC to 240 VAC (Single phase, Three OFF
conductors), 40 VA
terminals
・Manufacturer:
PHOENIX CONTACT
・Type:
Al4-12GY
●Cable specifications:
Outside dimension: 9.0 mm to 11.5 mm
Connect the terminals of the power cable to the terminal block

5 using the included driver intended for this purpose
●Check that the PE line on the factory side is
Terminal grounded.
block ●Connect the PE line first and then L → N in this
order.
●For further information about connecting the
sleeve terminal and the terminal block (→P.13-
4-2)
6 Fasten the cable
①Fasten the cable stopper using the

bolt.
②Secure them by tightening the
Cable clamp Cable stopper cable clamps.
③Be sure to pull the cable at 100 N
to make sure that it is firmly
secured.
NPM-D3 13-6-4-1 EJM6DE-MB-13M-01

Rear side
Main power supply
switch
●Bolts (7)
Pass the cable through cable clamp and cable stopper

4
Installation
①Remove the cable stopper.
②Loosen the cable clamp, and run
the power cable through the hole
underneath.
Cable clamp Cable stopper
NPM-D3 13-6-4-2 EJM6DE-MB-13M-01

Connection of the
13-6-4
al device
connec-
tion
conveyor R 2
Connection of the Ethernet cables and coupling cable (For 16 to 30 machines)
Rear side
Main power supply
switch
●Bolts (7)
Connect the Ethernet cable to the machine coupling section of

4 the adjacent NPM-D3
Rear side ●Run the Ethernet cable up through
body.
Ethernet cable
NPM-D3 13-6-4-3 EJM6DE-MB-13M-01

Connect the coupling cable, which is coming out of the
2 conveyor R with the coupling section of the adjacent NPM-D3
Rear side ●Run the coupling cable up through
body.
Coupling cable
3 Connect the supplied Ethernet cable to the HUB
①Connect the conveyor R to the conveyor L
Installation
16-port HUB 10-port HUB Conveyor R side : 16 ch of 16-port HUB
Conveyor L side : 10 ch of 10-port HUB
②Connect the 16-port HUB to the machine

coupling section of the adjacent NPM-D3.
On the 16-port HUB side, connect to one of the
ports from 1 ch to 15 ch. Any port from 1 ch to
15 ch is available.
NPM-D3 13-6-4-4 EJM6DE-MB-13M-01

Ethernet cables
13-6-5
al device
connec-
tion
LWS (line work station)
The result data accumulated in LNB can be displayed on LWS (Line Work Station) by establishing an
Ethernet cable connection between your PC and a PC intended for LNB use. No installation of dedicated
software is required for the PC, but Web browser is required. For details, please refer to the LNB instruction
manual.
Ethernet cable
PC (LWS)
If the cable is longer

than 10 m, contact us.
NPM-D3 13-6-5-1 EJM6DE-MB-13M-01

Turn OFF the main power Run the Ethernet cable
1 supply switch, and remove 2 through the cover
the cover of the Conveyor L
Rear side Ethernet cable ●Loosen the bolts of
the cover, and run
the Ethernet cable
from the bottom
surface of the main
body.
Cover
●Bolts (7) ●Bolts (2)
3 Connect the Ethernet cable with the coupling connector
Installation
Coupling connector
4 Attach the cover

5 Install the rear
cover
●Tighten the bolts of the
cover pressing the cable
lightly.
Cover
●Bolts (2)
NPM-D3 13-6-5-2 EJM6DE-MB-13M-01

Cable length
13-6-6
al device
connec-
tion
Items that need to be connected:

●Line signal (insulated) *1)
●AC (alternating current) power source
*1) The machine system and the system of ancillary equipment are already insulated.
The power source or the line signal cables that correspond to line configuration can vary depending on
your specifications. So, please contact us.
■Line configuration Example: conventional machine support
L,N,PE L,N,PE
Power N610129395AA Power
2m
N610129394AA
Conveyor L Conveyor R
2m
Conventional NPM-D3 NPM-D3

machine
CNEXR F M M F CNEXL
CNDUS F M M F CNDUP F
F M M F -XP -XS F M M F -XP -XS F

SMEMA SMEMA
Regarding connection N610129393AA

other than the NPM-D3,
please ask us. 2m
Power Power Power

L1,L2,L3,PE L1,L2,L3,PE L1,L2,L3,PE

Settings when
13-6-7
al device
connec-
tion
connected to LNB
When the machine is connected to LNB, configure the settings on the machine side.
Enter the number of in-line

1 machines after the first
machine (what number)
1 2
Installation
■If it should not be registered to LNB

3

Maintenance
PCB transfer settings
13-7 (when connected to non-NPM-D3 equipment)
When establishing a line connection with non-NPM-D3 equipment, it could cause double PCB transport and
others to malfunction depending on the timing of when the upstream machine transfers PCB request signals.
So, make sure that you change NPM-D3’s PCB transfer settings.
●This explains how to configure PCB transfer settings when flow is [from left to right]. Configure the
settings on NPM-D3 with a conveyor R installed on the right side, if flow is [from right to left].
■Option set
To turn “ON” the [Pre process other
company M/C joint] setting
1
■Option set
To turn “ON” the [Pre process
other company M/C joint2] setting

PCB transfer condition in each setting
●[Pre process other company M/C joint ] and [Pre process other company M/C joint2] cannot be turned [ON]
at the same time.
■Normal setting (default): [Pre process other company M/C joint] is turned [OFF], and
[Pre process other company M/C joint2], [OFF]
1 PCB request signal [ON]
PCB flow
1 After unloading a PCB, NPM-D3’s PCB request
signal is turned [ON].
Pre process 2 PCB is unloaded from the pre process machine.
machine other
3 NPM-D3’s PCB detection sensor (placement
than NPM-D3
NPM-D3 position) is turned [ON].
2 Unloading PCB
4 NPM-D3’s PCB request signal is turned [OFF].
* PCBs are normally unloaded as the PCB request
signal switches from the [OFF] state  the [ON]
state. So it cannot cause double PCB transport and
others to malfunction because it remains set as
4 PCB request signal [OFF] 3 PCB detection sensor default.
Placement position However, if the pre process machine does not
[ON] support our machine specifications, it may continue
unloading PCBs, with the PCB request signal
■Option setting: [Pre process other company turned [ON]. In that case, NPM-D3’s PCB transfer
Installation
M/C joint] is turned [ON] settings need to be changed.
PCB flow 1 PCB request signal [ON]
Pre process signal is turned [ON].
machine other 2 PCB is unloaded from the pre process machine.
than NPM-D3 NPM-D3
3 The extension conveyor’s PCB detection sensor
2 Unloading PCB (pre process side) is turned [ON].
3 PCB detection sensor

Pre process [ON]
4 PCB request signal [OFF] (Conveyor L)
■Option setting: [Pre process other company M/C joint2] is turned [ON]
PCB flow 1 PCB request signal [ON]
signal is turned [ON].
Pre process
machine other 2 PCB is unloaded from the upstream machine.
than NPM-D3 3 The extension conveyor’s PCB detection sensor
NPM-D3
2 Unloading PCB (pre process side) switches from [ON]  [OFF].
3 PCB detection sensor in

Pre process switches from
[ON] to [OFF]
4 PCB request signal [OFF]
(Conveyor L)

Maintenance
How to handle the tray
Describes how to handle the tray feeders. You can handle the screen at the front/rear. The tray feeder can
be attached or detached at the rear.
Attachment procedure
Tool used: Two spanner (30 mm), Allen wrench (3 mm)
Turn OFF the Remove the

1 power and lock 2 3 cover
the machine
OFF
Rear side
Left cover
Secure the tray feeder

6 with joint screws
●Secure the tray feeder to the
machine with joint screws
(A, B).
Joint screw A
Joint screw B
Attach the
Connect the power cable, communication
7 cable and air piping 8 cover
Air piping
(Rear side)
Power cable Communication cable Left cover

Attach the tray
4 feeder
●Be careful not to bump it against the main unit.
5 Adjust the height
Installation
●Adjust the height/level of
1. Loosen the lock nuts. the feeder as shown in the
2. Adjust the height using the figure below
adjustment nuts. Level gauge
3. Tighten the lock nuts. 19 mm  2 mm
●Casters: 4 pcs
Tray feeder
●The bubble should stay

Adjustment nut Lock nut within 1 division (0.1 mm/m)
9 10 Unlock the
machine and
ON
Rear side

Maintenance
How to handle the tray
Checking the air pressure
■Tray feeder
1 Check the air pressure
●Air pressure:
0.30 to 0.35 MPa
If it is outside the specified

2 range, adjust the air pressure
by turning the regulator knob A
1 Unlock.(pull it forward)
2 Adjust the pressure.(rotate)
A
3 Lock.(push it rearward)
Air pressure gauge
Regulator
Calibration
If the tray feeder is removed or installed, calibration must be performed.
STEP Item Action Reference

Pickup height
STEP4 Tray Pickup position 1 (→P.12-1, 12-18)
Pickup position 2

Maintenance
2D inspection head 1
13-9 (option)
This section describes the peripheral equipment that can be connected to the machine equipped with the
2D inspection head.
●Attachment/Detachment of 2D inspection head, inspection box, calibration jig, and safety cover is
conducted by our service personnel. Please contact us when necessary.
Overview of peripheral equipment

The following equipment can be connected to a machine with the 2D inspection head.
Peripheral equipment and connecting cables are to be prepared on your own.
Display Being connected to the inspection box, it displays the NG map that
shows which part of PCB is judged as NG.
Keyboard and mouse When it is connected to the inspection box, you can check/exit the NG
map on the display and perform display-related operations.
To connect both the keyboard and the mouse, USB HUB is required,
which should be obtained separately.
Network When the inspection box is connected to PCs running LWS and the
NPM-DGS system via a network, data can be created and modified on
the PCs using the image data of the inspection-target PCB sent from the
inspection box.
Do not connect the inspection box to a network other than the one LWS
is connected to.
Installation

Maintenance
13-9 (option)
Specifications of peripheral equipment

Describes the specifications required for the peripheral equipment.
■Display
●Resolution 1024×768 or higher
：
●Display color Approximately 16770000 colors or more
：
●Image input signal Analog RGB
：
●Connecting cable 5m or less in length
：
A 75 coaxial cable is recommended for each of the R, G, and B signal lines.
The shape and pin arrangement of the connector ‘MONITOR’ on the inspection box connecting the display are as
follows.
Terminal No. Signal name Pin connection
1 GRED
2 GREEN
3 GBLUE
4 NC
5 GND
6 GND
7 GND
8 GND
9 VP50
10 GND
11 NC
12 SDA-10
13 GHSYNC+10
14 GVSYNC+10
15 SCL-10
Connector: Mini D-sub 15 pin (Female)
■Keyboard
●Language ： English or Japanese
●Applicable OS ： Windows XP
●Connection interface ： USB 1.1 / 2.0
●Connecting cable ： Certified according to the USB standards of the keyboard to use
5 m or less in length
*The maximum current derived from the USB connector on the inspection box is 500 mA (DC+5V).

■Mouse
●Applicable OS ： Windows XP
●Connection interface ： USB 1.1 / 2.0
●Connecting cable ： Certified according to the USB standards of the mouse to use
5 m or less in length
*The maximum current derived from the USB connector on the inspection box is 500 mA (DC+5V).
■Network
●LAN type ： IEEE802.3ab(1000BASE-T)
Use connecting cables and network equipment that comply with the above
standards.
Installation

Maintenance
13-9 (option)
Connecting peripheral equipment

Describes how to connect the peripheral equipment.
1 Connect the display

Remove the connector cap of the MONITOR connector on
the inspection box, and connect the monitor cable.
Tighten the two locking screws of the cable connector to
secure it.
MONITOR connector
3 Connect the network

Open the ETHERNET connector cover on the inspection
box, and connect an Ethernet cable to the RJ-45 jack.
Do not connect the inspection box to a network other than
the one LWS is connected to.
ETHERNET connector

2 Connect the keyboard and mouse
Turn the USB connector cap on the inspection box to the
right by 90 degrees to open the connector hole.
Put your finger into the catch hole, and remove the cap.
Connect the USB cable connector to the USB connector of
the inspection box FA computer via the cap-removed
opening. Although there are two USB connectors arranged
one above the other, use the lower connector for connection.
USB connection The upper connector painted in black does not work.
Installation
Connection unavailable
Connect the USB cable
After connecting the USB cable, put the cap back in such a
manner that the route of the cable and catch hole align.
To connect both the keyboard and the mouse, USB HUB is required between the inspection box and the
keyboard / the mouse. USB HUB should be obtained separately.
Inspection USB HUB Keyboard

box *1)
Mouse
When connecting both the keyboard and mouse
*1) Self-powered USB HUB is recommended. In this case, power needs to be supplied to USB HUB
separately.
To use a bus-powered HUB, the total current consumed by the HUB, keyboard, and mouse needs to be
500 mA or lower.

Maintenance
13-9 (option)
Line configuration
Line configuration including machines equipped with the 2D inspection head and equipment to be used for
them are explained here.
HUB NPM-DGS
(2) N-CONR (5) Re-load conveyor (4) Inspection ejection

(1) N-CONL
(Customer) conveyor (Customer)
LNB はんだ検査部品検査

(SPI) (AOI)
HUB
(9) Mouse
(Customer)
(3) Inspection ejection (6)Wired scanner (7) Display (8) Connection cable
conveyor (Customer) (Customer) (Customer)
When the following optional functions are used, peripheral equipment required for their functions must be
prepared.
Optional function Description Peripheral equipment
Solder inspection NG Based on the inspection result of PCB ejected from

(3) Inspection ejection
ejection function the NPM-D3, OK or NG signal is output so as to (2) N-CONR
conveyor (Customer)
pass through the PCB if it is OK, and to stop if it is
NG. In addition, PCBs are checked on the conveyor
Component inspection or removed from the conveyor for repair or re-check,
the function which outputs the request signal as (2) N-CONR (4) Inspection ejection
NG ejection function
NPM-D3 ejects the next PCB is required. conveyor (Customer)
Re-load function This function activates with [Component inspection

NG ejection function]. A repaired NG PCB is re-
loaded and the machine performs re-placement of a (1) N-CONL (2) N-CONR
component which could not be placed with the
diagonal head or re-inspection. Moreover, the (6) Wired scanner (5) Re-load conveyor
removed NG PCB is controlled by a barcode and its (Customer)
trace is controlled by reading the barcode when the
PCB is re-loaded.
NG map display Although inspection NG location can be checked on (7) Display (8) Connection cable
function the screen of the machine, it also can be displayed (Customer) (Customer)
on the screen of the computer during component
inspection. (9) Mouse
(Customer)
*Peripheral equipment with ‘Customer’ noted must be prepared yourself.

You can arrange positions of the inspection head and conveyor flexibly according to your purpose.
■To be shorter the line length

PCBs resulting in NG by the solder inspection (SPI) and the component inspection (AOI) stop all
together on the inspection ejection conveyor at the end of line. Regarding placement points or patterns
judged as NG by the solder inspection (SPI), placement and component inspection (AOI) are also
automatically skipped.
Solder Component
inspection inspection
(SPI) (AOI)
Inspection ejection conveyor
■To inspect foreign matters against two types of components (reel type and tray type)
In foreign matters inspection, whether foreign matters are exists under the specified component or not is
inspected. If any foreign matter is found, the specified component is not placed. Therefore, this
Installation
component must be moved to the diagonal head of inspection or the downstream process. If both the
reel type and tray type are mixed together, arrange the machine as shown below. However a
component placed on the downstream process is not inspected even after placed.
Component
inspection
(AOI)
Inspection ejection conveyor

Attaching and detaching the
Maintenance
13-10 safety cover (option) 1
How to attach and detach the safety cover is described as an example of working from the front side.
●Detach the feeder cart (option) and the tray feeder before work.
(For how to detach the feeder cart→P.3-2, and for how to detach the tray feeder→P.13-8)
How to attach
detach the
1 2 3 feeder table
cover
(→P.3-3)
OFF
NPM-D3 13-10-1 EJM6DE-MB-13M-01

Attach the
4 Attach the safety cover (option) 5 feeder table
●Attach the safety cover to the main body while ensuring the cover
main-body drawer connector and the connector on the safety (→P.3-3)
cover reverse side are engaged with each other.
Installation
Tighten two
8 7 6 bolts on the
safety cover
ON
front side
Bolt
NPM-D3 13-10-2 EJM6DE-MB-13M-01

Attaching and detaching the
Maintenance
13-10 safety cover (option) 2
How to detach
detach the
1 2 3 feeder table
cover
(→P.3-3)
OFF
Loosen two
6 Attach the
feeder table
5 Remove the
safety cover
4 bolts on the
cover (option) safety cover
(→P.3-3) front side
Bolt
7 8
ON
NPM-D3 13-10-3 EJM6DE-MB-13M-01

14 Others
Maintenance
Machine information
14-1
The status and history of Plug and Play on the machine can be checked.
A
(The status of Plug and Play on the
machine is displayed)
B
(The history of Plug and Play on the
machine is displayed)

Others

Maintenance
Updating the machine
14-2-1 Update
system
Describes how to update machine software
Version information
1
1
(The machine’s name, serial number
and manufacture date, and the
version and updated time of each
system software program are
displayed)
Version update
1
2 Select the source of system

software to be updated
Select the system software to

3 be updated
●You cannot select any button if there
is no applicable software.
3 2 4
4
(Version up begins)
●If Version up has completed successfully,
a message appears notifying you of
successful completion of Version up,
then allowing you to select a system
software program.
NPM-D3 14-2-1-1 EJM6DE-MB-14M-01

Version history
1
1
(The names and update dates of versions
upgraded in the past are displayed)
■To change the type of system software
2 Select a system software type
Others
■If you do not upgrade
5
●A message appears prompting you

to restart the machine. Turn off
power once and turn it on again.
●If has been selected
in 2 , retrieve the SD card from the
machine and then turn on the power.
■If an update has failed
●If Version up is interrupted, a message appears

prompting you to restart the machine. Try again
after turning off the power and turning it on
again.
●If has been selected in 2 , retrieve
the SD card from the machine and then turn on
the power.
NPM-D3 14-2-1-2 EJM6DE-MB-14M-01

Maintenance
Updating the firmware

14-2-2 Update
Describes how to update firmware.
Version information
1
1
(Firmware’s name, position, version,
IC temperature and voltage are
displayed. '--' is displayed if information
is not available.)
Version update
1
1
Select the source of firmware to
2 be updated
3 Select firmware to be updated

●You cannot select any button if there
is no applicable firmware
3 2 4 4
(Version up begins)
●If Version up has completed
successfully, a message appears
notifying you of successful
completion of Version up, then
allowing you to select a firmware
program.
NPM-D3 14-2-2-1 EJM6DE-MB-14M-01

Version history
1
1
(The names and update dates of
versions updated in the past are
displayed)
■To change the firmware type
2 Touch the screen

(The input window appears)
3 Choose a firmware program
3 2
Others
■If you do not upgrade
5
●A message appears prompting you
to restart the machine. Turn off
power once and turn it on again.
●If has been selected
in 2 , retrieve the SD card from
the machine and then turn on the
■If an update has failed power.
●If Version up is interrupted, a message
appears prompting you to restart the
machine. Try again after turning off the
power and turning it on again.
●If has been selected in 2 ,
retrieve the SD card from the machine and
then turn on the power.
NPM-D3 14-2-2-2 EJM6DE-MB-14M-01

Maintenance
Option license 1
14-3
Describes how to register and delete the option license.
How to register the option license
A 1
1
A confirmation message appears, asking
whether to be registered with the wired
scanner or not.
●With the wired scanner:
●Without the wired scanner:
A Item
Any option licenses registered in the
machine are displayed.
■With the wired scanner
3 Enter the option number

●Enter the "Option Number" written on
the option sheet.
●An option number cannot be
registered if the serial number written
on the option sheet is not the same as
that on the product nameplate affixed
to the machine.
4
4
(The registered option is displayed)

5
5 The registered option appears
NOTICE
●Keep the option sheet included with the machine in a safe place.
Others

 Option number

Maintenance
Option license 2
14-3
How to delete the option license
1
Choose the item you want to
1 delete
■If you do not delete any option

2 license registered
3 Confirm that the item has

been deleted
■Registration of the data creation system (NPM-DGS)

●To use the data creation system (NPM-DGS) being connected to the machine, you need to register
the license on the NPM-DGS side.
For details, refer to the Instruction manual for NPM-DGS.

Maintenance
Common parameters 1
14-4
Selected parameters can be loaded from an SD card and all parameters can be saved in an SD card.
How to select and load a parameter from an SD card
2 A 1
2 Press [NO]
●Select a desired parameter.
3
3 4
A 4
Others
Parameter
Signal tower, Operator customize, Action ●Load the selected parameter from the SD
parameter (Determine), Action parameter card.
(Timer), Action parameter (Mechanical) or
Option parameter can be loaded or
saved.

Maintenance
Common parameters 2
14-4
How to save all parameters in an SD card
2
●All parameters are saved in the SD card.

15 Reference
Maintenance
Plastic parts listing 1

15-1
Main unit
Material component contents

and amount
No. Component name Weight (g) Q’ty
(filler, reinforcement)
Insert material
Touchscreen cover
A (Front)
160 2 ABS-FR (62)
Touchscreen cover
B 280 2 ABS-FR (62)
(Rear)
Front and rear safety covers PC
C (Top)
1838 2
(polycarbonate)
Front and rear safety covers PC
D (Bottom)
180 2
(polycarbonate)
Front side
C
C B A
D
Rear side
A B

XYユニット
XY unit

and amount
Insert material
Cable bearer PA
A (X-axis)
293 2
(polyamide)
Cable bearer PA
B 600 2
(Y-axis) (polyamide)
Reference
A

Maintenance

15-1
PCB conveyor

and amount
Insert material
PA
A Cable bearer 120 1
(polyamide)

Feeder cart

and amount
Insert material
PP
A Used-tape box 550 1
(polypropylene)
Reference

Maintenance

15-1
Feeder cartXYユニット
guide unit (Front side)

and amount
Insert material
POM
A Feeder cart drive unit guide 105 1
(polyacetal)
POM
B Feeder cart drive unit guide 164 1
(polyacetal)
POM
C Feeder cart drive unit guide 202 1
(polyacetal)
POM
D Feeder cart guide unit 334 1
(polyacetal)
POM
E Feeder cart support unit guide 127 1
(polyacetal)
Front side
C B A

Feeder cartXYユニット
guide unit (Rear side)

and amount
Insert material
POM
(polyacetal)
POM
(polyacetal)
POM
(polyacetal)
POM
D Feeder cart guide unit 424 1
(polyacetal)
POM
E Feeder cart support unit guide 127 1
(polyacetal)
Rear side
Reference
B
E D

Maintenance

15-1
XYユニット
Tray feeder

and amount
Insert material
PC
A Replenish-section door 429 1
(polycarbonate)
Inside plate of Replenish- PC
B section
112 1
(polycarbonate)
PC
C Magazine door window 207 1
(polycarbonate)
PP
D Refuse box 550 1
(polypropylene)
B
A


and amount
Insert material
POM
(polyacetal)
POM
(polyacetal)
POM
(polyacetal)
Reference

Maintenance

15-1
Conveyor L

and amount
Insert material
PC
A Upper cover 600 2
(polycarbonate)

Conveyor R

and amount
Insert material
PC
A Upper cover 600 2
(polycarbonate)
Reference
NPM-D3 15-1-10 EJM6DE-MB-15M-00

Maintenance
Safety data sheet (SDS) 1
15-2 (LCG100)
This [Safety data sheet (SDS)] is described based on information provided by the oil manufacturer.
Oil name: LCG100
Manufactured by: Panasonic Factory Solutions Co., Ltd
First aid measures

Inhalation Remove to fresh air. Place a blanket, etc. over the person to keep them warm and
resting. Get medical attention as necessary.
Skin contact Remove the contaminated clothing and shoes immediately. Rinse skin with plenty of
water or hot water and soap. If suffering from contact with a heated product rinse
skin and take aid for a burn. Get medical attention as necessary if symptoms such
as a rash and pain occur.
Eye contact Wash eyes with plenty of water and get medical attention immediately. Open your
eyelids wide with fingers and wash the entire eyeball and lid with plenty of water.
When wearing contact lenses, remove them and continue washing your eyes unless
the lenses stick on your eyes.
Ingestion Do NOT induce vomiting. Get medical attention immediately. Inducing vomiting
increases risk of aspirating oil to lung. If the inside of the mouth is contaminated,
rinse it with plenty of water.
Brief information on IF ingested, symptoms such as diarrhea and vomiting may occur.
the most important In case of eye contact, inflammation may appear.
signs and symptoms In case of skin contact, inflammation may appear.
If inhaling mist or vapor, symptoms such as nausea and vomiting may occur.
Fire fighting measures

Extinguishing agent Dry chemical powder, foam, carbon dioxide, fog, etc. are effective.
Extinguishing agents Fog water can be used to cool down. However water jet must not be used to
that cannot be used extinguish fire. Otherwise fire may spread and pose a danger.
Extinguishing method Stand on the windward side as much as possible to extinguish fire. Any person other
specified than response personnel must not enter the fire area. Remove ignition source from
the origin of fire and use suitable agent. In case of an early stage fire, use dry
chemical powder and carbon-dioxide extinguisher. For a large-scale fire, it is
effective to use foam agent to block out air currents. Water may pose danger of
expanding the fire.
Protection of fire- When extinguishing fire, be sure to stand on the windward side and wear protective
fighters gear. Since there is a possibility that toxic gas (carbon monoxide, etc.) is generated
by combustion and high temperature, use a respirator.

Accidental release measures
Personal precautions When removing this product, be sure to wear suitable protective gear. In case of a
large scale release,
Any person other than response personnel will be prevented from being in the
release area by taking measures such as putting rope around the area.
Environmental Great care must be taken to ensure that this product is not released into rivers or
precautions sewerage, etc. so it does not affect the environment.
Removal method Remove release source and stop releasing. In case of a small scale release,
remove this product with scoops and shovels. Or absorb it with soil, lint free cloth,
etc., put it into empty containers, and wipe this product away thoroughly with a lint
free cloth, etc. In case of a large scale release, block released grease with soil, lead
it into a safe place and put it into empty cases as much as possible so as not to let it
release into rivers or sewerage. If released onto the sea, put oil fence on the sea to
prevent spread and absorb it with absorption mat, etc. Agent, if used, must comply
with the technical standards stipulated by Ministry for Land, Infrastructure, Transport
and Tourism.
Handling and storage

■Handling
Human When handling, be sure to wear suitable protective gear and avoid direct contact.
exposure When removing this product from the container, use suitable tools. Do not put this
prevention product into your mouth or ingest it.
Fire and Be careful of flame. Avoid contact with flames, sparks, and hot products. Take
Tech- explosion static-electricity measures. Wear non-conductive clothes and shoes. When repairing
nical prevention or modifying a machine with this product still on, put the machine in a safe place and
mea- remove oil thoroughly beforehand. Use flameproof electric devices (with safety
sures structure).
Other Handle oil at room temperature. Be careful that neither water nor dirt are mixed. Be
Reference
cautions sure to close the case tightly each time you handle this product. If removing grease
when the grease removal section is hot, there is a risk of burning. Remove oil after
the grease removal section has been cooled down.
Cautions Use a tightly closed device, a machine or a local exhaust device. Since vapor
generated from this product is heavier than air, and the vapor lingers in the area, do
not diffuse vapor freely, and ventilate the work area well.
Safety precautions Avoid contact with flames, sparks, and hot products. Take static-electricity
measures. Wear non-conductive clothes and shoes. Use flame proof electric
devices (with safety structure). Do not apply pressure to an empty container.
Applying pressure may cause disruption. Do not weld, heat, perforate or cut
container. Otherwise residual product may generate fire with an explosion.
■Storage
Appropriate storage Avoid direct sunlight. Store oil in a ventilated space. Avoid heat, sparks, flames and
conditions accumulation of static electricity. Do not generate vapor freely. The electric product
used in a storage space must be flameproof. Earth the electric products. Avoid
contact and storage of oil with halogen, strong acid, alkali, and acid products.
Safety package Use a container complying with [Article 3-2 of the separate volume of rules and
materials regulation of hazardous products].

Maintenance
15-2 (LCG100)
Exposure controls/Personal protection

Machine If mist or vapor is generated, shut the source out, or provide exhaust ventilation.
measurements Ensure that eyewash stations and safety showers are proximal to the work-station
location.
■Tolerated concentration
Controlled No regulations (Working environment evaluation standards: Ministry of Health,
concentration Labor and Welfare Notice No. 26 March 27, 1995)
Tolerated Japan Society for Occupational Health (2004 version)
concentration Time load average TWA 3 mg/m3 (for mineral mist oil)
ACGIH (2004 version)
Time load average TWA 5 mg/m3 (for mineral mist oil)
■Personal protection equipment
Respiratory protection If mist or vapor is generated, wear a gas (organic gas) mask as necessary. Wear an
air mask in a closed space.
Hand protection Wear oil-proof (impervious) protective gloves.
Eye protection If there are droplets, wear regular protective glasses.
Skin and body Wear oil-proof long-sleeve coat and safety shoes. Remove grease-contaminated
protection clothes and wash them thoroughly before wearing.
Appropriate hygiene Do not eat, drink or smoke while working. Use hand-and eye-wash stations and
measures wash hands and face with plenty of water after handling this product. Do not take
contaminated gear such as gloves with you into a break room.
Physical and chemical properties

■Appearance
Physical state Solid
Color Brown
Order Characteristic
PH Not applicable
■Certain temperature/temperature range at which physical condition is changed
Boling point 200ºC or more (Initial boiling point)
Melting point No effective data currently available
Flash point 200ºC or more (Setaflash)

■Explosive properties
Explosion limit Lower limit : 1 capacity %
Upper limit : 7 capacity % (Estimation)
Density No effective data currently available

Solubility Insoluble in cold water

Stability and reactivity
Stability Stable at a room temperature and a regular pressure.
Reactivity May react if making contact with strong oxidizing agent.
Conditions to avoid Avoid contact with strong oxidizing agent.

Hazardous decomposition products Monoxide or other gas may be generated by combustion, etc.
Toxicological information
■Acute toxicity
Mineral oil Oral Rat LD50 5g/kg or more (Estimation)
Local effects Repeated or prolonged exposure of skin, eyes or mucous membrane

may cause damage.
Sensitization No effective data currently available
Carcinogenicity No effective currently available
Mineral oil
■Carcinogenicity
Mineral oil The OSHA evaluation says 'the mineral oil used for this product is
highly refined mineral oil and is classified into IARC Group 3 (Cannot
be classified as human carcinogen). The UE evaluation says 'it is not
necessary to apply the carcinogen category to the mineral oil used for
this product.'
Synthetic oil, additive and others No effective data currently available
Mutagenicity No effective data currently available
Reference
Teratogenicity No effective data currently available
Generative toxicity No effective data currently available
Others If ingested, symptoms such as diarrhea and vomiting may appear. In
case of skin contact, inflammation may appear. In case of eye contact,
inflammation may appear. If inhaling mist or vapor, you may feel sick.

Maintenance
15-2 (LCG100)
Disposal consideration
Waste of residues The residual waste is disposed of by business entities, industrial waste
disposal corporations authorized by the prefecture or the local
municipal entities that dispose of industrial waste. Since residual waste
is regulated as industrial waste by the 'legislation for waste disposal
and cleaning', they must not be buried or disposed of illegally.
Contaminated containers and After emptying the case of its contents thoroughly, dispose of it as
packaging industrial waste in the same way as residual waste.
Incineration Waste must be incinerated at a safety place, using a method free from
possibility of combustion or explosion that may pose a danger to others.
In addition, it must be confirmed by a person directly that incineration
has finished safety. It must be confirmed that burnt residue is lower
than the standards stipulated by 'the enforcement ordinance of the
legislation for waste disposal and cleaning.'
Ecological information
Mobility From the viewpoint of physical and chemical characteristics, this
product can move into air, water and soil.
Residual/Biodegradability No effective data currently available
Bioaccumulation No effective data currently available
Biotoxicity No effective data currently available
Transport information
United Nations category Not hazardous according to United Nations designations
United Nations code Not hazardous according to United Nations designations
■Domestic regulation
Surface transportation Not hazardous according to the fire defense legislation.
Container Use a container complying with 'Article 3-2 of the separate volume of
rules and regulation of hazardous product'.
Container label No regulation
Load method There must be little friction or movement of containers while being
transported. The height of the containers piled up must be 4m or less
while being transported. They must not be loaded together with
Category-1 hazardous products or Category-6 high-pressure gas.
Road legislation Not hazardous according to the road legislation
Sea legislation Not hazardous according to the sea safe legislation
Air transportation Not hazardous according to the air legislation
Transportation safety measures Confirm that the containers are not damaged, corroded or leaking
and conditions before transporting them. Load them so that they will not fall down,
drop, or be damaged and so that the load will not collapse. There must
be little friction or movement of containers while being transported.
Comply with the applicable laws when packaging, containing, labeling
and transporting.

Reference

Maintenance
15-2 (BARRIERTA IEL/V )
This [Safety data sheet (SDS)] is described based on information provided by the oil
manufacturer.
Oil name: BARRIERTA IEL/V
Manufactured by: NOK Kluber Co., LTD
First aid measures
Eye contact Immediately wash eyes with clean water for at least 15 minutes and get medical
attention.
Skin contact Remove contamination immediately and rinse with water and soap.
Get medical attention as necessary if symptoms such as inflammation and pain
appear.
Inhalation For large amount of inhalation, immediately remove to fresh air and keep the person
warm and resting.
Get medical attention as necessary. For irregular breathing or stopped breathing,
give rescue breathing.
Ingestion Do NOT induce vomiting. Get medical attention immediately.

Extinguishing method 1.The product is nonflammable . But if exposed to a high temperature, it produces
harmful cracked gas. So, in case of fire in its immediate surroundings, move it
promptly and extinguish the fire.
2.Fire fighting operations should be initiated from the windward side, wearing proper
protective equipment.
3.Sprinkle the surrounding machines with water to cool them.
Extinguishing agent Dry chemical powder, foam, carbon dioxide, fog, etc. are effective.

Handling method 1.Remove immediately possible ignition sources, hot products and inflammable
materials from the area, and stop a leak from a leakage spot as quick as possible.
2.Clean off or absorb it with any of scoops , shovels, a lint free cloth , drying sand
and so forth, and be careful not to drain the leaked product into rivers and drainage
channels by, for example, using a suitable container for collecting it.
3.When collecting , wear proper protective equipment (glove, protective mask,
glasses, goggle and so forth).

Handling method 1.Do not heat above 280ºC or do not smoke with the fingers stained by the product.
2.Exposure of skin or mucous membrane and the inhalation of mist may cause
health problems. So avoid direct contact when possible.
3.As a rule, handle the product at normal temperature, and then be careful not mix
in water, impurities and the like.
Storing 1.Avoid direct sunlight and store oil in a ventilated space.
2.Exposure of skin or mucous membrane and the inhalation of mist may cause
health problems. So avoid direct contact when possible.
3.As a rule, handle the product at normal temperature, and then be careful not mix
in water, impurities and the like.

Disposal method 1.Have it disposed of by industrial waste disposal corporations authorized by your
governor or local public entity.
Also, dispose waste properly according to the laws and regulations.
2.Because this product generates corrosive, harmful gas if incinerated, incinerate at
an acid-proof incinerator that has equipment for safety disposal.
Reference

Maintenance
15-2 (Touch lube)
This [Safety data sheet (SDS)] is described based on information provided by the oil
manufacturer.
Oil name: Touch lube
Manufactured by: Panasonic Factory Solutions, Co., Ltd.
First aid measures

Inhalation Immediately remove to fresh air and keep the person resting.
Get medical attention as necessary.
Skin contact Rinse with water and soap.
Eye contact Immediately wash eyes with plenty of running water and get medical attention.
Ingestion Get medical attention immediately.

Extinguishing agent Powder, carbon dioxide gas, bobble, dried sand.
Extinguishing method Keep ignition sources away from fire origin, and extinguish it with the aid of
extinguishing agent.
The use of water is dangerous due to the possible fire spread.

Removal method Absorption removal by using dirt, sand., sawdust, a lint free cloth, etc.

Handling Keep away from fire.
Prevent leakage.
Do not generate steam unnecessarily.
Ventilate well.
It is preferable to wear protective equipment.
Storage Avoid direct sunlight. Do not move close to high-temperature objects.
Appropriate storage Do not store in places where the temperature is above 40℃.
conditions
Exposure controls
Controlled No data available.
concentration
Tolerated No data available.
concentration
Personal protection
equipment Not indispensable from a practical standpoint.

Physical and chemical properties
Appearance semi-transparent ginger liquid
Oder Mixed order
Ratio 0.846
Hazards information
Flash point 83ºC (Quoting Isoparaffin flash point )
Ignition point 335ºC (Quoting Isoparaffin ignition point)
Ecological information
No data available.
Transport information
Cautions Keep away from fire.
Avoid rough handling so as to prevent damage to container.
Avoid direct sunlight
Waste of residues Before disposing, release gas in the open air without any fire around. Keep pressing
the button until the blowing sound stops.
Contaminated Contact a specialized waste disposal contractor to dispose of waste liquid.
containers and
packaging
Reference
NPM-D3 15-2-10 EJM6DE-MB-15M-00

Maintenance
15-2 (FL100)
This [safety data sheet (SDS)] is described based on information provided by the oil manufacturer.
Oil name: FL100
Manufactured by: SUMICO LUBRICANT CO., LTD.
FIRST-AID MEASURES
Inhalation Remove victim to fresh air and keep at rest in a position comfortable for breathing.
Call a physician if you feel unwell.
Skin Wash with plenty of soap and water.
Call a physician if you feel unwell.
Eye Immediately flush eyes with plenty of water for at least 15 minutes.
Call a physician.
Ingestion Rinse mouth. Do not induce vomiting.

Call a physician.
FIRE-FIGHTING MEASURES
Extinguishing Media Dry chemical, carbon dioxide(CO2), and foam
Specific Fire Fighting On small fires use carbon dioxide (CO2) or dry chemical.
On large fires use dry chemical or foam.
Do not approach containers suspected to be hot.
May emit poisonous fumes or corrosive fumes.
Protection for Wear full body protective clothing with breathing apparatus.
Fire-fighter
NPM-D3 15-2-11 EJM6DE-MB-15M-00

ACCIDENTAL RELEASE MEASURES
Personal Precautions Ventilate well indoor untill disposal is finished.
Wear protective equipments in case of operation.
Environmental Avoid release to the environment.
Precautions
Methods for Cleaning Remove potential ignition source in vicinity as soon as possible.
Up Prepare extinguishing agent.
Prevent leakage by enclosing with nonflammables and collect into empty container by scoop
or the like.
HANDLING AND STORAGE

Do not breathe vapor or mist.
Do not get in eyes, on skin, or on clothing.
Wear protective equipments when risk of exposure occurs.
Use in a well ventilated area.
Use spark-proof tools and explosion-proof equipment.
Keep away from heat, spark and flames.
Handling
Fire prohibited strictly.
After handling, wash well hands and face and rinse your mouth.
Do not eat, drink or smoke during work.
Avoid physical damage to containers.
Keep containers securely sealed when not in use.
To avoid sudden release of pressure, loosen closure cautiously before opening.
Storage Fire prohibited strictly.
Keep away from sources of ignition.
Store in a tightly closed container.
Store in a cool, dry, well-ventilated area away from incompatible substances.
Reference
Separate from oxidizing materials.
Store in a tightly closed container.
NPM-D3 15-2-12 EJM6DE-MB-15M-00

Maintenance
15-2 (FL100)
EXPOSURE/PERSONAL PROTECTION
Engineering Controls Facilities storing or utilizing this material should be equipped with an eyewash facility and a
safety shower.
Use adequate general or local exhaust ventilation to keep airborne concentrations below
the permissible exposure limits.
Ventilation fans and other electrical service must be non-sparking and have an explosion-
proof design.
Exposure Limit Values Methyl fluoro butyl ethers:Not Established
Ethene, 1,1,2,2-tetrafluoro-, homopolymer:Not Established
Synthetic oil:Not Established
Personal Respiratory In case of insufficient ventilation, wear suitable respiratory equipment.
Protective Protection
Equipment
Skin Wear chemical protective gloves and protective clothing to prevent skin exposure.
Protection
Eye Wear chemical worker's gogles.
Protection
PHYSICAL AND CHEMICAL PROPERTIES

Physical State Liquid
Color White
Odour Slight odor
pH Not available
Boiling Point(℃) Not available
Melting Point(℃) Not available
Flash point(℃) Not available
Auto-ignition Temperature(℃) Not available
Flmmability or Explosive Limits Lower:Not available
Upper:Not available
Vapour Pressure (KPa) Not available
Vapour Density Not available
Relative density(g/cm3) 1.55
Solublity Insoluble in water
Partition Coefficent: n-octanol/water Not available
Decomposition Temperature(℃) Not available
NPM-D3 15-2-13 EJM6DE-MB-15M-00

STABILITY AND REACTIVITY
Stability Stable under normal temperatures and pressures.
Conditions to Avoid Heat, flames, ignition sources and incompatibles.
Incompatible Materials Strong oxidizing agents, acids, alkalies.

Hazardous Decomposition Products Carbon monoxide, carbon dioxide and other oxidized substances.
TOXICOLOGICAL INFORMATIONT
Chemical name Acute Acute Acute Acute Acute Skin Serious eye
toxicity toxicity toxicity toxicity toxicity corrosion damage /
(oral) (dermal) (inhalation: (inhalation: (inhalation: /irritation eye
gas) vapour) dust,mist) irritation
Methyl fluoro butyl Classification Classification Classification Classification Classification Classification Classification
ethers not possible not possible not possible not possible not possible not possible not possible
polytetrafluoroethyl Classification Classification Classification Classification Classification Classification Classification
ene not possible not possible not possible not possible not possible not possible not possible
Synthetic oil Classification Classification Classification Classification Classification Classification Classification
not possible not possible not possible not possible not possible not possible not possible
Chemical name Respiratory Germ cell Carcinogeni Toxic to Specific Specific Aspiration
/skin mutagenicity -city reproduction target target hazard
sensitizer Organs Organs
/systemic /systemic
toxicity toxicity
following following
single repeated
exposure exposure
Reference
Methyl fluoro butyl Respiratory Classification Classification Classification Classification Classification Classification
ethers sensitizer: not possible not possible not possible not possible not possible not possible
Classification
not possible;
Skin
sensitizer:
Classification
not possible
Ethene, 1,1,2,2- Respiratory Classification Classification Classification Classification Classification Classification
tetrafluoro-, sensitizer: not possible not possible not possible not possible not possible not possible
homopolymer Classification
not possible;
Skin
sensitizer:
Classification
not possible
Synthetic oil Respiratory Classification Classification Classification Classification Classification Classification
sensitizer: not possible not possible not possible not possible not possible not possible
Classification
not possible;
Skin
sensitizer:
Classification
not possible
NPM-D3 15-2-14 EJM6DE-MB-15M-00

Maintenance
15-2 (FL100)
ECOLOGICAL INFORMATION
Chemical name Hazardous ｔo the aquatic Hazardous ｔo the aquatic environment
environment (Acute) (Chronic)
Methyl Fluorobutyl Ether Classification not possible Classification not possible
Polytetrafluoroethylene Classification not possible Classification not possible
Synthetic oil Classification not possible Classification not possible
DISPOSAL CONSIDERATIONS
Waste of residues Make consigning contracts with an authorized industrial waste management
contractor for handling waste materials such as waste liquid or containers.
Effluents used for cleaning containers or equipment shall not be allowed to
directly flow into drainageways.
Waste materials produced by effluent treatment or incineration equipment shall
be treated according to the Waste Management and Public Cleansing Law or
related regulations, or the authorized industrial waste management contractor.
When incinerating waste materials, toxic gas may be produced. An appropriate
incinerator equipped toxic gas removal equipment shall be used.
Contaminated containers and When disposing of empty containers, remove all contents and handle by make
packaging consigning contracts with the authorized industrial waste management
contractor.
TRANSPORT INFORMATION
■Domestic regulation
Surface transportation Follow transport methods defined by Fire Service Act and Industrial Safety and
Health Act.
Sea legislation Follow transport methods defined by Sewerage Act.
Air transportation Follow transport methods defined by Civil Aeronautics Act.
Export Applied to the (2) in Appended Table 1-16 of the Export Control Order
■International regulation
UN Class Not determined.
UN No. Not determined.
Packing Group Not determined.
NPM-D3 15-2-15 EJM6DE-MB-15M-00

REGULATORY INFORMATION
High Pressure Gas Safety Act Not applicable
Fire Service Act Non-hazardous products
Industrial Safety and Health Act Article 57 (Hazardous Materials Requiring Notification): Not applicable
Article 57-2 (Hazardous Materials Requiring Notification): Not applicable
Ordinance on Prevention of Organic Solvent Poisoning: Not applicable
(Pollutant Release and Transfer Not applicable
Register (PRTR)
Poisonous and Deleterious Not applicable
Substances Control Act
Water Pollution Control Act Order for enforcement of hazardous substances in article 2 (Drainage
standard)
Fluorine and its compound(Methyl Fluorobutyl Ether)
Except sea area: 8mg/L or less, Sea area: 15mg/L or less (F)
Order for enforcement of hazardous substances in article 2 (Drainage
standard)
Fluorine and its compound (Polytetrafluoroethylene)
Except sea area: 8mg/L or less, Sea area: 15mg/L or less(F)
Order for enforcement of hazardous substances in article 2 (Drainage
standard)
Fluorine and its compound (Synthetic fluid)
Sewerage Act Order for enforcement of water quality standard substance in article 9
(standard substances)
Fluorine and its compound(Methyl Fluorobutyl Ether)
Order for enforcement of water quality standard substance in article 9
Fluorine and its compound (Polytetrafluoroethylene)
Order for enforcement of water quality standard substance in article 9
Fluorine and its compound (Synthetic fluid)
Reference
Law Relating to the Prevention of In Article 4, Lubricant oils prohibited drainage from vessels (Synthetic fluid)
Marine Pollution and Maritime
Disasters.
Act on the Evaluation of Chemical Not applicable
Substances and Regulation of Their
Manufacture, etc (Article 2 Chemical
substances)
Waste Disposal and Public Cleansing Industrial waste
Law
OTHER INFORMATION
References
JIS Z 7250
GHS data-base (NITE)
The information above is believed to be accurate and represents the best information currently available to us.
However, we make no warranty of merchantability or any other warranty, express or implied, with respect to
such information, and we assume no liability resulting from its use. Users should make their own investigations
to determine the suitability of the information for their particular purposes. In no event shall the company be
liable for any claims, losses, or damages of any third party or for lost profits or any special, indirect, incidental,
consequential or exemplary damages, howsoever arising, even if the company has been advised of the
possibility of such damages.
NPM-D3 15-2-16 EJM6DE-MB-15M-00

NPM-D3 15-2-17 EJM6DE-MB-15M-00
NOTICE
The contents of this document are subject to change without prior notification.
Some of our products fall under the export control items (or technologies) established in the Foreign
Exchange and Foreign Trade Act. When exporting (or providing technologies overseas), please check its
legal restrictions and be sure to take necessary procedures such as to obtain the export permission.
When reselling or moving this equipment, please make sure to contact us, our sales subsidiaries or agents.
Panasonic Factory Solutions Co., Ltd.

1375,Kamisukiawara, Showa-cho, Nakakoma-gun, Yamanashi, Japan
Phone number: +81-55-275-6223
Fax number: +81-55-243-4972
© Panasonic Factory Solutions Co., Ltd. 2014

Unauthorized copying and distribution is a violation of the law.
Printed in Japan

Maintenance NPM

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

You might also like

Maintenance NPM

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Maintenance NPM

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Operating Instructions

Use of this equipment

About this equipment

For proper operation

Contents of CE Declaration of Conformity

(Manufacturer) (Council directive)

NPM-D3 S-3 EJM6DE-BP-01N-00

Model No. Position Head Configuration

Front side Mounting head Mounting head No head

Front side Inspection head

Front side Dispensing head Mounting head

Front side Inspection head

Front side Dispensing head No head

NPM-D3 S-4 EJM6DE-BP-01N-00

NPM-D3 S-6 EJM6DE-BP-03N-00

NPM-D3 S-7 EJM6DE-BP-03N-00

Easy-to-find Titles / Tag headlines/ Page number

Middle classification number Middle classification title When followed by

NPM-D3 S-8 EJM6DE-BP-04N-00

Shows to turn in the Indicates to draw out to

Shows to push another switch or button

NPM-D3 S-9 EJM6DE-BP-04N-00

Visual procedure/operation by reading

Operation mode button, press the button

Shows to push the

Shows the operation results.

Terms used in the button on the screen may differ from

NPM-D3 S-10 EJM6DE-BP-04N-00

NPM-D3 S-11 EJM6DE-CT-01N-00

NPM-D3 S-12 EJM6DE-CT-01M-01

inspection -2 Cleaning the nozzle holder

Every-140- -3 Cleaning the nozzle holder

-4 Cleaning the PCB-support blocks

-7 Cleaning the feeder table

-8 Cleaning the table surface

-9 Cleaning the calibration jig

-10 Cleaning and checking the dummy

NPM-D3 S-13 EJM6DE-CT-01M-01

-5 Replacing the collar

-3 Inspecting the 1006 nozzle (option)

-4 Replacing the heater/thermocouple

NPM-D3 S-15 EJM6DE-CT-01M-01

NPM-D3 S-16 EJM6DE-CT-01M-01

NPM-D3 S-17 EJM6DE-CT-01M-01

NPM-D3 S-18 EJM6DE-CT-01M-01

DANGER result in death, severe bodily injury or major property

WARNING Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that could result

CAUTION Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that could result

Indicates actions that must not be carried out.

Indicates actions that must be carried out.

Indicates matters to which attention must be paid.

Indicates that you must read the manual.

NPM-D3 1-1-1 EJM6DE-SF-01N-01

If you sense any danger or abnormalities,

●When you push the emergency stop switch, the

Front side ■For several machines connected

Once the emergency

NPM-D3 1-1-2 EJM6DE-SF-01N-01

Do not disable safety